HomeMy Public PortalAboutORD14251 BILL NO. 2007-71
• SPONSORED BY COUNCILMAN Klindt
ORDINANCE NO.
AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI, AUTHORIZING THE
MAYOR AND CITY CLERK TO EXECUTE AN AGREEMENT WITH GBH BUILDERS FOR
MUNICIPAL BUILDING EXPANSION - RELOCATION OF IT DEPARTMENT PROJECT.
WHEREAS, GBH Builders has become the apparent lowest and best bidder on the
Municipal Building Expansion - Relocation of IT Department project;
NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ENACTED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF
JEFFERSON, MISSOURI, AS FOLLOWS:
Section 1. The bid of GBH Builders is declared to be the lowest and best bid and
is hereby accepted.
Section 2.The Mayor and City Clerk are hereby authorized to execute an agreement
with GBH Builders for Municipal Building Expansion - Relocation of IT Department.
• Section 3. The agreement shall be substantially the same in form and content as
that agreement attached hereto as Exhibit A.
Section 4. This Ordinance shall be in full force and effect from and after the date
of its passage and approval.
Passed: L d� Approved:4VfZ
residing Officer PLMayor
ATTEST: APPR ED AS T FORM:
y Cle City Counselor
•
142e)
1
• Specifications
1 Contract Documents
t
1
r MUNICIPAL BUILDING
EXPANSION
t (I.T. and FINANCE)
CITY OF JEFFERSON
r 320 East McCarty Street
lie Jefferson City, Missouri
City Project Number: 2351
r June 20, 2007
(TAA Project Number: 0650)
ri
r
1
AVI
t 7W
1
k
ds
4iial-M inc.
631 West Main Street
Jefferson City,Missouri 65101
' Phone: (573)636-5000
Fax: (573)636-6133
Email:mail@thearchitectsalliance.com
t }
x � Y
a 0 t
IV
o5. tali�{t .y t °t
If
Al
It
'C Ilk
It
t
r ry R t uy rt y { 4f
S;.
yy Y
3 4k
+t t
9
MUNICIPAL BUILDING EXPANSION
• (I.T. and FINANCE)
1► CITY OF JEFFERSON
11 320 East McCarty Street
Jefferson City, Missouri
1� City Project No. 2351
1 (TAA Project No. 0650)
June 20, 2007
II
Prepared by:
1} Architect
II THE ARCHITECTS ALLIANCE, INC.
631 West Main Street
7 Jefferson City, Missouri 65101
Telephone (573) 636-5000
Fax (573) 636-6133
Ii Structural Engineer:
II • ALLSTATE CONSULTANTS, P.C.
1 3312 Lemone Industrial Blvd.
I Columbia, Missouri 65201
Telephone (573) 875-8799
1 Fax (573) 875-8850
1 Mechanical. Plumbing & Electrical Engineers:
MIDWEST ENGINEERING AND DESIGN
J 3100 Brown Station Road, Suite D
1� Columbia, Missouri 65202
Telephone (573) 875-0045
Fax (573) 875-0046
11
Civil Engineer:
CENTRAL MISSOURI PROFESSIONAL SERVICES
2500 East McCarty Street
Jefferson City, Missouri 65101
Telephone (573) 634-3455
_l • Fax (573) 634-8898
1�
1{
r
Il
Il
l • TABLE OF CONTENTS
Il
• Advertisement for Bids
1
Notice to Bidders
1� Information for Bidders
Ill Bid Form *
J Bid Bond *
' Anti-Collusion Statement
• Contractor's Affidavit *
0 Minority Business Enterprise Statement
'I 0 Minority Business Utilization Agreement
• Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Law
Prevailing Wage Determination
• 9 9
0 Affidavit of Compliance Public Works Contracts Law
0 Excessive Unemployment Exception Certification
i
• Construction Contract
1� 0 Performance, Payment, and Guarantee Bond
• General Provisions
• Special Provisions
0 Attachments
'i 0 Addendums ( If Any )
(* INDICATES THIS ITEM INCLUDED IN BID PACKET FOR SUBMISSION OF BID)
1�
•
1�
1�
i
•
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
Sealed bids will be received at the office of the Purchasing Agent, 320 East McCarty
Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101, until 1:30 PM CST, on Friday, July 20, 2007.
1j The bids will be opened and read aloud in the Council Chambers at 1:30 PM CST on
that same day.
The proposed work for the project entitled "Project No. 2351, Municipal Building
Expansion (I.T. and Finance)" will include the furnishing of all material, labor, and
' equipment to expand the upper level of the John G. Christy Building and renovate the
existing office space.
' A pre-bid conference will be held at 2:00 P.M., on Tuesday, July 10, 2007 in the
Boone/Bancroft Conference Room of City Hall, 320 E, McCarty Street,Jefferson City,
MO 65101. All prospective bidders are urged to attend.
Copies of the contract documents required for bidding purposes may be obtained from
DocuCopy LLC, 3334 Brown Station Road, Columbia, MO 65202-2242, telephone
' (573) 814-1700. A non-refundable deposit of Seventy-Five Dollars ($75.00) will be
• required for each set of plans and specifications.
The contract will require compliance with the wage and labor requirements and the
payment of minimum wages in accordance. with the Schedule of Wage Rates
established by the Missouri Division of Labor Standards.
T i reserves the right to reject an and all bids and to waive informalities therein
The City es g � y ,
to determine which is the lowest and best bid and to approve the bond.
' CITY OF JEFFERSON
Terry Stephenson
Purchasing Agent
1
Publication Dates Tuesday, July 2007
•
r -
l
I1
• NOTICE TO BIDDERS
1
Sealed bids will be received at the Office of the Purchasing Agent, City Hall, 320 East
li McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri, until 1:30 PM CST on Friday, July 20, 2007.
The bids will be opened and read aloud in the Council Chambers at 1:30 PM CST on
that same day.
1�
The proposed work for the project entitled "Project No. 2351 Municipal Building
Expansion (I.T. and Finance)" will include the furnishing of all material, labor, and
') equipment to expand the upper level of the John G. Christy Building and renovate the
existing office space.
A pre-bid conference will be held at 2:00 P.M., on Tuesday, July 10, 2007 in the
Boone/Bancroft Conference Room of City Hall,320 E. McCarty Street,Jefferson City,
MO 65101. All prospective bidders are urged to attend.
I
All equipment, material, and workmanship must be in accordance with the plans,
specifications, and contract.documents on file with DocuCopy LLC, 3334 Brown Station
'! Road, Columbia, MO 65202-2242.
Copies of the contract documents required for bidding purposes may be obtained from
li the DocuCopy LLC, 3334 Brown Station Road, Columbia, MO 65202-2242. A non-
refundable deposit of Seventy-Five Dollars ($75.00) will be required for each set of
1� plans and specifications.
A certified check on a solvent bank or a bid bond by a satisfactory surety in an amount
equal to five (5) percent of the total amount of the bid must accompany each proposal.
A one-year Performance and Guarantee Bond is required.
i
The owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive informalities therein
to determine which is the lowest and best bid and to approve the bond.
CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI
1)
1�
J
,j
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
•
IB-1 SCOPE OF WORK
The work to be done underthis contract includes the furnishing of all technical personnel, labor,
materials, and equipment required to perform the work included in the project entitled"Project
'I No. 2351, Municipal Building Expansion (I.T. and Finance)" in accordance with the plans
i and specifications on file with the Finance Department.
The proposed work for this project will include the furnishing of all material, labor, and
equipment to expand the upper level of the John G. Christy Building and renovate the
existing office space.
IB-2 INSPECTION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND SITE OF WORK
The bidder is required to examine carefully the site of the proposed work, the bid, plans,
specifications,supplemental specifications,special provisions, and contract documents before
submitting a bid. Failure to do so will not relieve a successful bidder of the obligation to furnish
all materials and labor necessary to carry out the provisions of the contract.
' I13-3 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
If the bidder has any questions which arise concerning the true meaning or intent of the Plans,
• Specifications or any part thereof, which affect the cost, quality, quantity, or character of the
project, he shall request in writing, at least five (5) days prior to the date fixed for the bid
opening, that an interpretation be made and an addendum be issued by the City, which shall
then be delivered to all bidders to whom Plans and Specifications have been issued. All
addenda issued shall become part of the contract documents. Failure to have requested an
addendum covering any questions affecting the interpretation of the Plans and Specifications
,i shall not relieve the Contractor from delivering the completed project in accordance with the
intent of the Plans and Specifications to provide a workable project.
I13-4 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
The City of Jefferson may make such investigations as deemed necessary to determine the
,. ability of the bidder to perform the work and the bidder shall furnish to the City all such
information and data for this purpose as the City may request. The City reserves the right to
reject any bid if the evidence submitted by the bidder or investigation of such bidder fails to
satisfy the City that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract
and to complete the work contemplated therein.
' I13-5 EQUIVALENT MATERIAL
Wherever definite reference is made in these Specifications to the use of any particular material
or equipment, it is to be understood that any equivalent material or equipment may be used
which will perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design,subject to the approval
• of the City.
'I
I13-6 BID SECURITY •
Each bid must be accompanied by a certified check or bid bond made payable to the City of '
Jefferson for five percent (5%) of the amount of the bid. Bid securities will be returned after
award of the contract except to the successful bidder. ,
Should the successful bidder fail or refuse to execute the bond and the contract required within
seven (7)days after he has received notice of acceptance of his bid, he shall forfeit to the City ,
as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security deposited with his bid.
IB-7 PREPARATION OF BIDS '
Bids must be made upon the prescribed forms attached in these Contract Documents. Only
sealed bids will be considered, all bids otherwise submitted will be rejected as irregular. '
All blank spaces in the bid must be filled in and no change shall be made in the phraseology
of the bid, or addition to the items mentioned therein. Any conditions, limitations or provisions
attached to bids will render them informal and may be considered cause for their rejection. '
Extensions of quantities and unit prices shall be carried out to the penny.
IB-8 PRICES '
The price submitted for each item of the work shall include all costs of whatever nature involved '
in its construction, complete in place, as described in the Plans and Specifications.
Section 144.062 RSMo provides that the City's sales tax exemption may be used for the ,
purchase of goods and materials for this project. The contract for the project will authorize and
direct the Contractor to utilize the City's sales tax exemption in the purchase of goods and
materials for the project. This provision shall apply to only those purchases totaling over$500 '
from an individual supplier.
All sales taxes on those items which do not qualify for the use of the City's sales tax exemption '
and for which sales tax might lawfully be assessed against the City are to be paid by the
Contractor from the monies obtained in satisfaction of the Contract. It being understood by the
bidder, that the bid prices submitted for those items shall include the cost of such taxes.
I13-9 APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES '
In cases where any part or all of the bidding is to be received on a unit price basis, the '
quantities stated in the bid will not be used in establishing final payment due the successful
Contractor. The quantities stated on which unit prices are so invited are approximate only and
each bidder shall make his own estimate from the plans of the quantities required on each item '
and calculate his unit price bid for each item accordingly. Bids will be compared on the basis
of number of units stated in the bid. Such estimated quantities, while made from the best
information available, are approximate only. Payment of the Contract will be based on actual '
number of units installed on the complete work.
•
'I
IB-10 LUMP SUM ITEMS
Payment for each lump sum item shall be at the lump sum bid for the item, complete in place,
and shall include the costs of all labor, materials, tools and equipment to construct the item as
' described herein and to the limits shown on the Plans.
IB-11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
� The Bid and the Bid Security guaranteeing the same shall be placed in a sealed envelope and
marked "Project No. 2351, Municipal Building Expansion (I.T. and Finance)".
IB-12 ALTERNATE BIDS
i
' In making the award, if alternate bids have been requested, the alternate bid which will be in
the best interest of the City will be used.
IB-13 WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
If a bidder wishes to withdraw his bid, he may do so before the time fixed for the opening,
Y P 9,
' without prejudice to himself. No bidder may withdraw his bid for a period of ninety (90) days
after the scheduled closing time for the receipt of bids.
No bids received after the time set for opening for bids will be considered.
IB-14 RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS
The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids,to waive any informality in the bids received,
or to accept the bid or bids that in its judgement will be in the best interests of the City of
Jefferson.
' IB-15 AWARD OF CONTRACT
If, within seven (7) days after he has received notice of acceptance of his bid, the successful
'i bidder or bidders shall refuse or neglect to come to the office of the Director of Information
Technology and to execute the Contract and to furnish the required Performance and Payment
Bonds and Insurance, properly signed by the Contractor and the Surety and Sureties
' satisfactory to the City of Jefferson as hereinafter provided, the bidder or bidders shall be
deemed to be in default and shall forfeit the deposit.
' IB-16 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND
A Performance and Payment Bond in an amount equivalent to one hundred percent (100%)
of the Contract price, must be furnished and executed by the successful bidder or bidders. A
form for the bidders use is contained in these Contract Documents.
The issuing Surety shall be a corporate Surety Company or companies of recognized standing
J' licensed to do business in the State of Missouri and acceptable to the City of Jefferson.
J
IB-17 INDEMNIFICATION AND INSURANCE
The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the City from all claims and suits for loss
of or damage to property, including loss of all judgments recovered therefore, and from all
expense in defending said claims, or suits, including court costs, attorney fees and other '
expense caused by any act or omission of the Contractor and/or his subcontractors, their
respective agents, servants or employees.
The Contractor shall be required to provide the City of Jefferson with a Certificate of Insurance '
outlining the coverage provided.
I13-18 BID SECURITY RETURNED TO SUCCESSFUL BIDDER '
Upon the execution of the Contract and approval of Bond the Bid Security ill be returned to
P PP ,
Y
the bidder unless the same shall have been resented for collection prior to such time in which
P P ,
case the amount of the deposit will be refunded by the City.
I13-19 NONDISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT '
Contracts for work under this bid will obligate the Contractor and subcontractors not to
discriminate in employment practices. '
IB-20 PREVAILING WAGE LAW
The principal contractor and all subcontractors shall pay not less than the prevailing wage '
hourly rate for each craft or type of workman required to execute this contract as determined
by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations of Missouri, pursuant to Sections 290.210
through 290.340 inclusive of the Revised Statutes of Missouri, 1994 as amended. (See
Determination included herewith.)
IB-21 GUARANTEE t
The Contractor shall guarantee that the equipment, materials and workmanship furnished
under this contract will be as specified and will be free from defects for a period of one year '
from the date of final acceptance. In addition, the equipment furnished by the Contractor shall
be guaranteed to be free from defects in design.
Within the guarantee period and upon notification of the Contractor by the City, the Contractor '
shall promptly make all needed adjustments, repairs or replacements arising out of defects
which, in the judgment of the City become necessary during such period. '
The cost of all materials, parts, labor, transportation, supervision, special tools, and supplies
required for replacement of parts, repair of parts or correction of abnormalities shall be paid by '
the Contractor or by his surety under the terms of the Bond.
The Contractor also extends the terms of this guarantee to cover repaired parts and all ,
replacement parts furnished under the guarantee provisions for a period of one year from the
date of installation thereof.
1
f_
i
1,
• If within ten days after the City gives the Contractor notice of defect, failure, or abnormality of
the work, the Contractor neglects to make, or undertake with due diligence to make, the
necessary repairs or adjustments, the City is hereby authorized to make the repairs or
adjustments itself or order the work to be done by a third party, the costs of the work to be paid
,) by the Contractor.
In the event of an emergency where, in the judgment of the City delays would cause serious
' loss or damage, repairs or adjustments may be made by the City or a third party chosen by the
J City without giving notice to the Contractor, and the cost of the work shall be paid by the
Contractor or by his surety under the terms of the Bond.
IB-22 NOTICE TO PROCEED
A written notice to begin construction work will be given to the Contractor by the City of
') Jefferson within ten (10) days after the Contract is approved by the City Council. The time for
completion of the project shall begin to run on the date established in this notice.
IB-23 WORK SCHEDULE
I
To insure that the work will proceed continuously through the succeeding operations to its
completion with the least possible interference to traffic and inconvenience to the public, the
Contractor shall, at the request of the City, submit for approval a complete schedule of his
proposed construction procedure,stating the sequence in which various operations of work are
to be performed.
• IB-24 CONTRACT TIME
The contract time shall be One Hundred Eighty (180) calendar days.
' IB-25 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Liquidated damages shall be assessed at the rate of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per
calendar day until the work is complete, should the project not be completed within the contract
' time.
IB-26 POWER OF ATTORNEY
'j Attorneys-in-fact who sign bid bonds or contract bonds must file with each bond a certified and
effectively dated copy of their power of attorney.
IB-27 BID PACKET
�} Each bid must be submitted on the prescribed forms and contain certain certifications and
documentation.
'l Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the
JJbidder, the bidder's address, and the name of the project for which the bid is being submitted.
• If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing the bid must be enclosed in another
�� envelope addressed as follows:
Purchasing Agent •
City of Jefferson, MO '
320 E. McCarty Street
Jefferson City, MO 65101
For the convenience of bidding this project, a "BID PACKET" has been included with the i
project manual. This packet contains the necessary forms to be submitted with the bid
proposal. The contents of this packet include the following: '
1) BID FORM
2) BID BOND
3) ANTI-COLLUSION STATEMENT
4) CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT
5) MINORITY BUSINESS UTILIZATION AGREEMENT
END OF INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS '
•
•
i1
-
45
_.r GA$ Ru lders. Inc.
l � o4'uldras �` Pa; � 2 Jefferson CitY, MO 65142
T o: �'T y Ci ar
320 East McCarty Street
Jefferson City, Missouri 65101
THE UNDERSIGNED BIDDER, having examined the plans, specifications, regulations
of the Contract, Special Conditions, other proposed contract documents and all
addenda thereto; and being acquainted with and fully understanding(a)the extent and
I character of the work covered by this Bid;(b) the location, arrangement, and specified
requirements for the proposed work- .(c) the location, character, and condition of
existing streets, roads, highways, railroads, pavements, surfacing, walks, driveways,
curbs, gutters, trees, sewers, utilities, drainage courses,. structures, and other
installations, both surface and underground which may affect or be affected by the
proposed work, d the nature and extent of the excavations to be made and the type,
character, and general condition of materials to be excavated; (e) the necessary
handling and rehandling of excavated materials;(f)the location and extent of necessary
a Ts or probable dewatering requirements; (g)the difficulties and hazards to the.work which
might be caused by storm and flood. water, (h) local conditions relative to labor,
transportation,hauling,and rail delivery facilities; and(l)all otherfactors and conditions
affecting or which may be affected by the work.
HEREBY PROPOSED to furnish all required materials,supplies, equipment,tools,and
plant; to perform all necessary labor and supervision; and to construct, install, erect,
and complete all work.stipulated, required by, and in accordance with the proposed'
.;T ,. . contract documents and the drawings, specifications; and other documents referred to
therein (as altered, amended, or modified by addenda) in the manner and time
prescribed and that he will accept in full payment sums determined by applying to the
quantities of the following items, the following unit prices and/or any lump sum
payments provided, plus or minus any special payments and adjustments provided in
the specifications and he understands thatthe estimated quantities herein given are not
guaranteed to be the exact or total quantities required for the completion of the work
shown on the drawings and described in the specifications, and that increases or
decreases may be made over or under the Contract estimated quantities to provide fol
needs that are determined during progress of the work and that prices bid shall apply
to such increased or decrease-, quantities as f�llov�„
se n s:
4�
9 :!
r5,
'� PROJECT:
NWHIC'IFAL BUIL04K413
;i. — IN-'-'� 6..
,z i -!
i CE
t'z T. R )
C17Y OF UIEFFE-RSUNN
.�20 East MCC-v�St"rBISt'
The undersigneC, havino SX2mirlied and b=inc fiamiiiar with ths con
diticns affe--ti,ng the V'hcrk a
2
2-nd with the conir'S". 00CUMCInt-s including the Dra,�Pvings, Niotice to Bid'ders. I alf.ilitt L;On Tor
8';dders, Generak Provisfons, Specia! Provisions, ar-n
addenda nurnber- Lhrouah inclusive,
as prepared by the City of Jefferson and The Architects Alliance, Inc., Jefferson City, Missouri,
hereby propose to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, services, etc., required for the
performance and completion of the aforementioned Work as follows:
BASE BID:
The lump sum of
Dollars ($
'� LIST.OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS:
Name and Address: Work to be Performed:
A(T Masonry Installation
Structural Steel (Supplier)
Structural Steel (installer)
Roofing & Flashing Installer
Windows & Storefront Installer
Gypsum Board & Ceiling Assemblies
7-j Carpet Installer
'!
Paintinc
L4
Mechanicai (HV.AC)
�j' ��,(,�' '� t;/� � t7. t JT" � �i`_f��'' J
Electrical
1
v
U
1�
Z
1
Builders
JGeneral Contractors
August 15, 2007 -
The Architects Alliance
631 West Main
Jefferson City, MO 65101
Re: Municipal Building Expansion (I.T. and Finance)
City of Jefferson
320 East McCarty Street
Jefferson City, MO
Listed below are some cost saving ideas for the above-referenced project.
-Eliminate detail G12—A101
Completely remove the overhead coiling door, frame and glass @ proposed transaction
counter. Also remove new glass from existing frame. Includes all associated framing
• and finish work.
Delete Glass& Glazing $375.00
7_J Delete HM Frames $290.00
Delete Carpentry Labor $200.00
' Delete Painting $50.00
Delete Overhead Coiling Door(labor Incl.) $1,311.00
Total $2,226.00
' -Eliminate operable windows
Replace the operable windows with standard storefront framing& glass
Delete operable windows &replace w/glass $5,624.00
-Eliminate work @ Rooms 110
Eliminate the drywall partitions and door openings.
Room 110 . $1,245.00
-Eliminate new ceiling work @existing portion of Room 105
Eliminate the demolition and installation of new ceilings in the area. Also includes
eliminating all electrical circuits and new lighting for 101, 102, 105 & 110. We will have
• to remove several existing tiles for access, and we will have to build a drywall header the
' length of the building to accommodate the change from new ceiling to old.
1
Delete Electrical $10,050.00
' Delete Acoustical Ceilings $6,000.00
Add Drywall Header $1,500.00
J Total $14,550.00
-Eliminate the reconstruction testing and the test&balance b a certified balance company.
• P g p
We can take&record CFM readings @the end of the project.
Delete testing $3,800.00
Eliminate brick veneer and replace w/-spandrel glass per SSI #1.
�l
Delete Structural Steel Framing $4,500.00
Delete Installation of SS Framing $2,640.00
Delete Brick Veneer $9,026.00
Add Aluminum Framing& Spandrel Glass $5,250.00
' Total $10,916.00
-Eliminate carpeting&VCT as detailed on the finish schedule.
rP g
Delete Floor Covering $12,500.00
Add for concrete prep& sealer $1,500.00
'] Total $11,000.00
�J
' Please bear in mind that these are estimates and that cost may fluctuate slightly pending the final
changes. We feel the estimates are VERY close,yet some things may have been overlooked due
to the time constraints.
• Please advise if we can offer any additional information.
Thank
you,
1
Jake Hunget
' President
PO Box 945
Jefferson City, MO 65102
Phone: 573/893-3633 - Fax: 573/893-5847
1
�i
u
m'UE-S ld'Vd'i z' t'kfit.�^u via.'1 0"FUS'.
If. a Bidd. Y`'FvR ..
�l�� �?4:.eL VdZ f� �6` vv �=:F
` .
� 'A
�L�LE `�� CGM.! gala Y i!G'iF`
!t
The undersigned hereby agrees to eornpi:,te the project within One Hundred, Eighty
1801 calendar days,subject to the stipulations of the regulations of the Contract and the
Special Provisions.
It is understood and agreed that if this bid is accepted, the prices quoted above include "r
I` all applicable state taxes and that said taxes shall be paid by the Contractor. `_,_
The undersigned, as Bidder, hereby declares that the only persons or firms interested r,
I in the bid as.principal.or principals is or are named.herein and that no other persons or
l� firms than herein mentioned have any interest in this bid or in the Contract to be
entered into; and this bid is made without connection with any other person, company,
or parties making a bid; and that it is in all respects fair and in good faith, without :
I� eoilusion or fraud.
The undersigned agrees that the accompanying bid deposit shall become the property 7�
of the Owner, should he fail or refuse to execute the Contract or furnish Bond as called s'
for in the specifications within the time provided.
If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered to the
undersigned within sixty (60) days after the date of opening of bids, or any time
'I thereafter before this bid is,withdrawn, the undersigned will, within ten (10)days after
._� the date of such mailing,telegraphing, or delivering of such notice, execute and deliver
a Contract in the form of Contract attached.
c
The undersigned hereby designates as his office to which such notice of acceptance
may be mailed, telegraphed, or delivered:
'
3441 North Ten Mile Dr, PO Box 945- Jefferson City, MO 65109
�.� It is understood and. agreed that this bid may be withdrawn at any time prior to the
scheduled time for the opening of bids or any authorized postponement thereof.
is a r % Bid Bond
Attached hereto i,. � Bid Bond she sum of 5
}
ffar ,c.. .h€e &e 1),. make pay. bie to the Cie,; od Jeffffs_ ane
I
�{ j
\. .
n u � SgdeE
y � .
bUs neEs
�ber �§mn
° R co:o gOn, GB Builders, I
�
\}ƒ
by . .
kTitle president
SEAL
\
Business Address of Bidder po Bo 945 Jefferson city, MO 65102 .
\ R Bidder is a corporation, supply the fo Howing information: .
y \ \
State n which incorporated Missouri
Name and Address of RS:
\ `
President Jake @En2et .
\ ' . 41517 A person Rd, Russellville, k0 65074
) .
Secretary Da Li)ar t .
®ƒ
Route 1 Box 239, Russellville, MO 65074
f . . . .
(
Date Jul 20, 2007
G .
) . . .
�\
[
k . .
) .
[
�} :
THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS
AIA Document A310
Bid Bond
I
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT WE GBH Builders, Inc.
3441 North 10 Mile Drive, Jefferson City, MO 65109
'I as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and Western Surety Company
P. O. Box 5077 Sioux Falls SD 57117-5077
a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of SD
' as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Jefferson City MO
320 E. McCarty, Jefferson City, MO 65101
as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of Five Percent of Amount Bid
Dollars ($ 5% ),
for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs,
executors; administrators, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS,the Principal has submitted a bid for Project 2351, Municipal Building Expansion, (I.T. & Finance)
�l
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with
the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or
Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt
payment of labor and materials furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter
such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the
penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith
contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise
I to remain in full force and effect.
Signed and sealed this 20th day of July 2007
GBH Builders, nc.
/yj (Princi q (Seal)
(Witness)
By: I
Q �u✓IyE - t`r�5.�'�e✓I r�- (Title)
Western Surety Company
(Surety) (seal)
(Witness)
�] B lJ�
Attomey-in-Fact Brenda L. Linze �—(Tine)
•
Surety Phone No. 800-331-6053
AIA DOCUMENT A310•BID BOND•AIA•FEBRUARY 1970 ED.•THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 N.Y.AVE.,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006
i
Western Surety Company
,) POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
C
Know All Men By These Presents,That WESTERN SURETY COMPANY,a South Dakota corporation,is a duly organized and existing corporation
jhaving its principal office in the City of Sioux Falls,and State of South Dakota, and that it does by virtue of the signature and seal herein affixed hereby
make,constitute and appoint
Barbara A Miller, Brenda L Linze, J Douglas Joyce, Eric Van Buskirk, Linda L Nutt,
Lawrence S Kaminsky, Michael T Kelly, Eugene A Klein, Thomas P Latz, Thomas M English,
,l Michael Lee Swift,Individually
of Kansas City,MO, its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to sign,seal and execute for and on its behalf
1 bonds,undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature
In Unlimited Amounts -
and to bind it thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by a duly authorized officer of the corporation and all the acts of said
Attomey,pursuant to the authority hereby given,are hereby ratified and confirmed.
I
This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By-Law printed on the reverse hereof,duly adopted,as indicated,by
i
the shareholders of the corporation.
In Witness Whereof,WESTERN SURETY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its Senior Vice President and its corporate seal to
be hereto affixed on this 23rd day of January,2007.
4WEr'o WESTERN SURETY COMPANY
ft
AV.wt r'
.SgAb,f�lP
�N OPT
l Paul .BruflaL Senior Vice President
State of South Dakota 1
Jj ss
County of Minnehaha
On this 23rd day of January,2007,before me personally came Paul T.Bmflat,to me known,who,being by me duly swom,did depose and say: that
he resides in the City of Sioux Falls, State of South Dakota;that he is the Senior Vice President of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY described in and
which executed the above instrument;that he knows the seal of said corporation;that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal;that it was
so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and
,I acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporation.
' My commission expires +
f D. KRELL j
November 30,2012 i S AE L NOTARY PUBLIC SE�4L r
a SOUTH DAKOTA r
+
,i D.Krell,Notiry Public
11{{ CERTIFICATE
1, L.Nelson,Assistant Secretary of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY do hereby certify that the Power of Attorney hereinabove set forth is still in
force,and further certify that the By-Law of the corporation printed on the reverse hereof is still in force. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed
f my name and affixed the seal of the said corporation this_ 20th day of July 2007
x:11.11 N
, �r�gpRq, WESTERN SURETY COMPANY
VJ�tN pPK�P`
'i L.Nelson,Assistant Secretary
Form F4280-09-06
1�
,
1
Authorizing By-Law
ADOPTED BY THE SHAREHOLDERS OF WESTERN SURETY COMPANY
ii
This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By-Law duly adopted by the shareholders
of the Company.
I
t
Section 7. All bonds, policies, undertakings, Powers of Attorney, or other obligations of the corporation shall be executed in the
ii corporate name of the Company by the President, Secretary, and Assistant Secretary, Treasurer, or any Vice President, or by such other
officers as the Board of Directors may authorize. The President, any Vice President, Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, or the Treasurer
1 may appoint Attorneys in Fact or agents who shall have authority to issue bonds, policies, or undertakings in the name of the Company.
i
The corporate seal is not necessary for the validity of any bonds, policies, undertakings, Powers of Attorney or other obligations of the
1 corporation. The signature of any such officer and the corporate seal may be printed by facsimile.
i�
1�
1
h
�1
i
, I
i�
1'
1
1'
1
11
it
LJ
1;
1'
i
1 ANTI-COLLUSION STATEMENT
') STATE OF Missouri )
COUNTY OF Cole _)
Jake Hunget being first
duly sworn, deposes and says that he is President of
ll TITLE OF PERSON SIGNING
Ij GBH Builders, Inc.
NAME OF BIDDER
that all statements made and facts set out in the bid for the above project are true and.
correct; and that the bidder (the person, firm, association, or corporation making said
bid)has not,either directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated in any
collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in
connection with such bid of any contract which result from its acceptance.
1�
• Affiant further certifies that bidder is not financially interested in, or financially affiliated
' with, any other bidder for the above project.
Ir (BY'
(BY)
Sworn to before me this day of ILA 200�Z .
1�
P6 1,rn J
NOTARY PUB
1,
,`1 My commission expires:
11 Mowy Pe bib 7auran'Se- 6
STATE OF WhSSOtjp
^741nY; F
Cafiawa-
'
2008
yCCSSrtSRFSSIUt
p�
1;
1'
I
1� CONTRACTORS AFFIDAVIT
1` This affidavit is hereby made a part of the Bid, and an executed copy thereof shall
accompany each Bid submitted.
1'
STATE OF Missouri )
ss
1� COUNTY OF Cole
1
The undersigned, Jake Hunget
1 of lawful age, being first duty sworn states upon oath that he is
'i President of
GBH Builders, Inc.
1I
; the contractor submitting the attached bid, that he knows of his own knowledge and
states it to be a fact that neither said bid nor the computation upon which it is based
li include any amount of monies, estimate or allowance representing wages, moneys or
expenses, however designated, proposed to be paid to persons who are not required
to furnish material or actually perform services upon or as a part of the proposed
liproject.
1� AFFIANT
Subscribed and sworn to before me, Notary Public, in and for the County and State
aforesaid, this day of U 20_67
1
1� NOTARY PLWLIC
• y Commission Expires:
IC�....- cpMF1f;Ivr?,SGESAU$e t
Notary PU V� RI
STATE O
1 cellss�aY
cQmmicslon C,feAO 233
My commissiors Extes N°v.i9,2008
Y' S t NVE S-S UT 11,Z�k IN 0 N A G R E_E K 7
'�
e a s+ tv,o -ontra-
-d- re-s o attempt to expend a, LH - ��j
The bid -I ac L .2) %
ave,ardau, forMlincrity Business E-ntarprise(MEE). For purposes ofthis,coal, the
'j term "Miincritkj Business Enterprise" shall mean 2 bUSiri&_SS
'� 11. Which is at least 51 percent owned by one or more minorities or women,
or, in the case of a publicly owned business, at least 51 percent of the
stock of which is owned by one or more minorities or women; and
'� 2. Whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one
or more such individuals.
"Minority Group Member"or"Minority'! means a person who is a citizen.or lawful
permanent resident of the United States, and who is:
I Black(a person having origins in any of the black racial groups of Africa);
2. Hispanic (a person of Spanish or Portuguese culture with origins in
• Mexico, South or Central America, or the Caribbean Island, regardless of
race);
'� 3. Asian American (a person having origins in any of the original peoples of
the Far East, Southeast Asia, the Indian sub-continent, or the Pacific
Islands);
4. American Indians and Alaskan Native (a person having origins in any of
'� the original peoples of North America);
5. Member of other groups, or other individuals, found to be economically
'j and socially disadvantaged by the Small Business Administration under
Section 8(a) of the Small Business Act, as amended [15 U.S.C. 637(a)].
6. A female person who requests to be considered as an MBE, and who
"owns"and "controls" a business as defined herein.
,� Minority Business Enterprises may be employed as contractors,subcontractors,
or suppliers.
•
1�
l'
B, The bidder must indicate the Mincrit( Business Enterprise(s) proposed for
Utilization as part of this contract as follows:
?Dame and Addresses Mature of Dollar V51u-- of
of Minorite Fir�ll Pa: ici ation Particiou".'an
T& P"s
}�bg� t�s
AM
c�
Total Bid Amount" f ��'��i r (�C� Total:
Percentage of Minority Enterprise Participation: %
C. The bidder agrees .to certify that the minority firm(s) engaged to provide
materials or services in the completion of this project: (a) is a bona fide Minority
Business Enterprise; and(b)has executed a binding contract to provide specific
materials or services for a specific dollar amount.
A roster of bona fide Minority Business Enterprise firms will be furnished by the
City of Jefferson. The bidder will provide written notice to the Liaison Officer of
the City of Jefferson indicating the Minority Business Enterprise(s) it intends to
use in conjunction with this contract.. This written notice is due five days after
notification to the lowest bidder.
Certification that the Minority Business Enterprise(s) has executed a binding
contract with the bidder for materials or services should be provided to the MBE
Coordinator at the time the bidder's contract is submitted to the MBE
Coordinator.
D. The undersigned hereby certified that he or she has read the terms of this
agreement and is authorized to bind the bidder to the agreement herein set
forth.
Jake Hun et - President
NAM r AU T ORIZED OFFICER
DATE July 20, 200
SIGN TIRE 0-FA-
F AU i HO _ED OFFICER
•
AFFIDAVIT
COMPLIANCE WITH PREVAILING
WAGE LAW
' Before me, the undersigned Notary Public, in and for the County of ,
State of , personally came and appeared
NAME POSITION
of the
NAME OF COMPANY
(A corporation)(a partnership)(a proprietorship)and after being duly sworn did depose
' and say that all provisions and requirements set out in Chapter 290, Section 290.210
through and including 290.340, Missouri Revised Statutes, pertaining to the payment
of wages to workmen employed on public works projects have been fully satisfied and
' there has been no exception to the full and complete compliance with said provisions
and requirements and with Annual Wage Order No. 14, Section 026, Cole County
in carrying out-the contract and work in connection with Project No. 2351, Municipal
' Building Expansion (I.T. and Finance) located at Jefferson City in
• Cole County, Missouri, and completed on the day of , 20
' SIGNATURE
' Subscribed and sworn to me this day of , 20
' NOTARY PUBLIC
,. My commission expires:
' STATE OF MISSOURI
ss
' COUNTY OF )
•
1
i
i
Missouri
•
Division of Labor Standards
WAGE AND HOUR SECTION
' pF TFiF s
O
MATT.BLUNT, Governor
1
Annual Wage Order No. 14
Section 026
1 COLE COUNTY
In accordance with Section 290262 RSMo 2000, within thirty (30) days after a certified copy of this
1 Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of State as indicated below, any person who may
be affected by this Annual Wage Order may object by filing an objection in triplicate with the Labor and
Industrial Relations Commission, P.O. Box 599, Jefferson City, MO 65102-0599. Such objections must
set forth in writing the specific grounds of objection. Each objection shall certify that a copy has been
furnished to the Division of Labor Standards, P.O. Box 449, Jefferson City, MO 65102-0449 pursuant to
8 CSR 20-5.010(1). A certified copy of the Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of
/. State of Missouri.
' Oriainal Signed by
Allen E. Dillingham, Director
Division of Labor Standards
1
This Is A True And Accurate Copy Which Was Filed With The Secretary of State: March 9,2007
1 Last Date Objections May Be Filed: April 9,2007
Prepared by Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations
1
Building Construction Rates for REPLACEMENT PAGE Section 026 •
COLE County '
i
ective Basic Over-
OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits
Increase Rates Schedule Schedule
Asbestos Worker $26.44 55 60 $13.66
Boilermaker $28.49 57 7 $18.62
Bricklayers-Stone Mason $26.06 59 1 7 $10.71
Carpenter 1 $22.181 60 1 15 1 $9.77
Cement Mason $21.591 9 1 3 1 $9.70
Electrician Inside Wireman $27.211 28 7 1 $10.69+ 13%
Communication Technician USE ELECTRICIAN INSIDE WIREMAN RATE ,
Elevator Constructor a $37.115 26 54 $16.23
Operating Engineer
Group 1 5/07 $25.02 86 66 $16.42
-Group II 5/07 $25.02 86 66 $16.42
-Group III 5/07 $23.77 86 66 $16.42
-Group III-A 5/07 $25.02 86 66 $16.42
-Group IV 5/07 $22.79 86 66 $16.42 ,
Group V 5/07 $25.72 86 66 $16.42
Pipe Fitter b $31.25 91 69 $18.18
Glazier $15.00 FED $1.42
Laborer(Building): ('
General $18.37 110 7 $8.99
First Semi-Skilled $20.37 110 7 $8.99
Second Semi-Skilled $19.371 110 7 $8.99
Lather USE CARPENTER RATE
Linoleum Layer&Cutter USE CARPENTER RATE
Marble Mason $26.06 59 7 $10.71
Millwri ht $23.18 60 15 $9.77
Iron Worker $23.57 11 8 $15.04
Painter $20.25 18 7 $7.82
Plasterer $20.61 94 1 5 $9.49
Plumber $22.00 FED $3.31
Pile Driver $23.18 60 15 $9.77
Roofer $25.25 12 4 $9.84
Sheet Metal Worker $25.55 40 23 $11.18 '
Sprinkler Fitter $16.00 FED $2.55
Terrazzo Worker $26.06 59 7 $10.71
Tile Setter $26.06 59 7 $10.71
Truck Driver-Teamster ,
Group 1 $21.15 101 5 $8.00
Group II $21.85 101 5 $8.00
Group III $21.55 101 5 $8.00
Group IV $21.85 101 5 $8.00 ,
Traffic Control Service Driver
Welders-Acetylene& Electric
Fringe Benefit Percentage is of the Basic Hourly Rate
Attention Workers: If you are not being paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits contact the Division
of Labor Standards at(573)751-3403. '
"Annual Incremental Increase •
r
"SEE FOOTNOTE PAGE ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 6/07 ,
IlBuilding Construction Rates for Section 026
• COLE County Footnotes
1) Effective aslc ver-
OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits
Increase Rates Schedule Schedule
1�
Il
�� •Welders receive rate prescribed for the occupational title performing operation to which welding is incidental.
Use Building Construction Rates on Building(s)and All Immediate Attachments.Use Heavy Construction
rates for remainder of project. For the occupational titles not listed in Heavy Construction Sheets,use Rates shown
on Building Construction Rate Sheet.
a-Vacation: Employees over 5 years-8%; Employees under 5 years-6%
b- All work over$3.5 Million Total Mechanical Contract-$31.25,Fringes-$18.18
All work under$3.5 Million Total Mechanical Contract-$29.91,Fringes-$14.08
'1
•
Il
Il
1�
Il
•
1� ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO.14 3/07
COLE COUNTY ,
OVERTIME SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION •
FED: Minimum requirement per Fair Labor Standards Act means time and one-half(1 %)shall be paid for all work in excess ,
of forty(40)hours per work week.
NO.9: Means the regular workday starting time of 8:00 a.m.(and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.)may be moved forward to '
6:00 a.m. or delayed one hour to 9:00 am. All work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be
compensated at one and one-half(1%2) times the regular pay. In the event time is lost during the work week due to weather
conditions,the Employer may schedule work on the following Saturday at straight time. All work accomplished on Sunday and ,
holidays shall be compensated for at double the regular rate of wages. The work week shall be Monday through Friday,except for
midweek holidays.
NO. 11: Means eight(8)hours shall constitute a day's work,with the starting time to be established between 6:00 a.m. and 8:00 ,
a.m.from Monday to Friday. Time and one-half(1%)shall be paid for first two(2)hours of overtime Monday through Friday and
the first eight (8)hours on Saturday. All other overtime hours Monday through Saturday shall be paid at double (2)time rate.
Double(2)time shall be paid for all time on Sunday and recognized holidays or the days observed in lieu of these holidays. '
NO. 12: Means the work week shall commence on Monday at 12:01 a.m. and shall continue through the following Friday,
inclusive of each week. All work performed by employees anywhere in excess of forty(40)hours in one(1)work week,shall be ,
paid for at the rate of one and one-half(I%:)times the regular hourly wage scale. All work performed within the regular working
hours which shall consist of a ten(10)hour work day except in emergency situations. Overtime work and Saturday work shall be
paid at one and one-half(1'/z)times the regular hourly rate. Work on recognized holidays and Sundays shall be paid at two (2)
times the regular hourly rate. '
NO. 18: Means the regular work day shall be eight(8)hours. Working hours are from six(6)hours before Noon(12:00)to six
(6)hours after Noon (12:00). The regular work week shall be forty(40)hours,beginning between 6:00 a.m.and 12:00 Noon on '
Monday and ending between 1:00 p.m. and 6:00 p.m.on Friday. Saturday will be paid at time and one-half(1'/z). Sunday and
Holidays shall be paid at double(2)time. Saturday can be a make-up day if the weather has forced a day off,but only in the week •
of the day being lost. Any time before six(6) hours before Noon or six (6)hours after Noon will be paid at time and one-half
NO. 26: Means that the regular working day shall consist of eight(8)hours worked between 6:00 a.m., and 5:00 p.m., five(5)
days per week,Monday to Friday,inclusive.Hours of work at each jobsite shall be those established by the general contractor and
worked by the majority of trades. (The above working hours may be changed by mutual agreement). Work performed on '
Construction Work on Saturdays, Sundays and before and after the regular working day on Monday to Friday,inclusive,shall be
classified as overtime,and paid for at double(2)the rate of single time. The employer may establish hours worked on a jobsite for
a four(4)ten(10)hour day work week at straight time pay for construction work;the regular working day shall consist of ten(10) ,
hours worked consecutively,between 6:00 a.m.and 6:00 p.m.,four(4)days per week,Monday to Thursday, inclusive. Any work
performed on Friday,Saturday,Sunday and holidays,and before and after the regular working day on Monday to Thursday where
a four(4)ten(10)hour day workweek has been established,will be paid at two times(2)the single time rate of pay. The rate of
pay for all work performed on holidays shall be at two times(2)the single time rate of pay. ,
•
ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 '
A W 14 026 OT.doc Page I of 4 Pages
COLE COUNTY
OVERTIME SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
• NO. 28: Means a regular workday shall consist of eight (8) hours between 7:00 a.m. and 5:30 p.m., with at least a thirty (30)
minute period to be taken for lunch. Five(5)days a week,Monday through Friday inclusive,shall constitute a work week. The
Employer has the option for a workday/workweek of four(4)ten(10)hour days(4-10's)provided:
�I -The project must be for a minimum of four(4)consecutive days.
-Starting time may be within one(1)hour either side of 8:00 a.m.
-Work week must begin on either a Monday or Tuesday: If a holiday falls within that week it shall be a consecutive
'I work day. (Alternate: If a holiday falls in the middle of a week, then the regular eight (8) hour schedule may be
implemented).
-Any time worked in excess of any ten(10)hour work day(in a 4-10 hour work week)shall be at the appropriate
overtime rate.
�I All work outside of the regular working hours as provided,Monday through Saturday,shall be paid at one&one-half(1%)times
the employee's regular rate of pay. All work performed from 12:00 a.m.Sunday through 8:00 am. Monday and recognized
holidays shall be paid at double(2)the straight time hourly rate of pay. Should employees work in excess of twelve(12)
consecutive hours they shall be paid double time(2X)for all time after twelve(12)hours. Shift work performed between the
hours of 4:30 p.m.and 12:30 a.m.(second shift)shall receive eight(8)hours pay at the.regular hourly rate of pay plus ten(10%)
percent for seven and one-half(7%)hours work. Shift work performed between the hours of 12:30 am.and 8:00 a.m.(third shift)
shall receive eight(8)hours pay at the regular hourly rate of pay plus fifteen(15%)percent for seven(7)hours work. A lunch
period of thirty(30)minutes shall be allowed on each shift. All overtime work required after the completion of a regular shift shall
be paid at one and one-half(I%)times the shift hourly rate.
NO.40: Means the regular working week shall consist of five(5)consecutive(8)hour days'labor on the job beginning with
Monday and ending with Friday of each week.. Four(4) 10-hour days may constitute the regular work week. The regular working
day shall consist of eight(8)hours labor on the job beginning as early as 7:00 a.m.and ending as late as 5:30 p.m. All full or part
' time labor performed during such hours shall be recognized as regular working hours and paid for at the regular hourly rate. All
. hours worked on Saturday and all hours worked in excess of eight(8)hours but not more than twelve(12)hours during the regular
working week shall be paid for at time and one-half(1'/z)the regular hourly rate. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays
and all hours worked in excess of twelve(12)hours during the regular working day shall be paid at two(2)times the regular
hourly rate. In the event of rain,snow,cold or excessively windy weather on a regular working day,Saturday may be
designated as a"make-up"day. Saturday may also be designated as a"make-up"day,for an employee who has missed a day
of work for personal or other reasons. Pay for"make-up"days shall be at regular rates.
' NO. 55: Means the regular work day shall be eight(8)hours between 6:00 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. The first two (2) hours of work
J performed in excess of the eight(8) hour work day,Monday through Friday,and the first ten(10) hours of work on Saturday,
shall be paid at one&one-half(1'/z)times the straight time rate. All work performed on Sunday,observed holidays and in excess
'i of ten(10)hours a day,Monday through Saturday,shall be paid at double(2)the straight time rate.
. 1
NO.57: Means eight(8)hours per day shall constitute a day's work and forty(40)hours per week,Monday through Friday,shall
' constitute a week's work. The regular starting time shall be 8:00 a.m. The above may be changed by mutual consent of
authorized personnel. When circumstances warrant,the Employer may change the regular workweek to four(4)ten-hour days at
the regular time rate of pay. It being understood that all other pertinent information must be adjusted accordingly. All time
worked before and after the established workday of eight(8)hours,Monday through Friday,all time worked on Saturday,shall be
paid at the rate of time and one-half(1'/2) except in cases where work is part of an employee's regular Friday shift. All time
worked on Sunday and recognized holidays shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay.
,i
A W 14 026 OT.doc ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14
Page 2 of 4 Pages
r
COLE COUNTY ,
OVERTIME SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION •
NO.59: Means that except as herein provided,eight(8)hours a day shall constitute a standard work day,and forty(40)hours per
week shall constitute a week's work. All time worked outside of the standard eight(8)hour work day and on Saturday shall be
classified as overtime and paid the rate of time and one-half(1%2). All time worked on Sunday and holidays shall be classified as
overtime and paid at the rate of double(2)time. The Employer has the option of working either five(5)eight hour days or four
(4) ten hour days to constitute a normal forty (40) hour work week. When the four (4) ten-flour work week is in effect, the
standard work day shall be consecutive ten(10)hour periods between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 6:30 p.m. Forty (40)hours per
week shall constitute a weeks work,Monday through Thursday,inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the
Employer's control,then Friday and/or Saturday may,at the option of the Employer,be worked as a make-up day;straight time not '
to exceed ten (10)hours or forty (40) hours per week. When the five day (8)hour work week is in effect, forty (40)hours per
week shall constitute a week's work, Monday through Friday, inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the
Employer's control, then Saturday may, at the option of the Employer, be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed
eight(8)hours or forty(40)hours per week. The regular starting time(and resulting quitting time)may be moved to 6:00 a.m.or
delayed to 9:00 a.m. Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost due to holidays.
NO.60: Means the Employer shall have the option of working five 8-hour days or four 10-hour days Monday through Friday. If '
an Employer elects to work five 8-hour days during any work week, hours worked more than eight(8)per day or forty (40) per
week shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/z) the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits Monday through Friday. SATURDAY
MAKE-UP DAY: If an Employer is prevented from working forty (40) hours, Monday through Friday, or any part thereof by '
reason of inclement weather(rain or mud),Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate.
It is agreed by the parties that the make-up day is not to be used to make up time lost due to recognized holidays. If an Employer
elects to work four 10-hour days,between the hours of 6:30 a.m.and 6:30 p.m. in any week,work performed more than ten(10)
hours per day or forty (40) hours per week shall be paid at time and one half(1'/z) the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits '
Monday through Friday. If an Employer is working 10-hour days and loses a day due to inclement weather,the Employer may
work ten(10)hours on Friday at straight time. Friday must be scheduled for no more than ten(10)hours at the straight time rate,
but all hours worked over the forty(40)hours Monday through Friday will be paid at time and one-half(I%2)the hourly wage rate
plus fringe benefits. All Millwright work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated for ,
at time and one-half (1'/z)the regular Millwright hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits. The regular work day starting of 8:00 a.m. •
(and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.) may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m. or delayed one (1) hour to 9:00 a.m. All work
accomplished on Sundays and recognized holidays,or days observed as recognized holidays, shall be compensated for at double
(2) the regular hourly rate of wages plus fringe benefits. NOTE: All overtime is computed on the hourly wage rate plus an
amount equal to the fringe benefits.
NO.86: Means the regular work week shall consist of five(5)days,Monday through Friday,beginning at 8:00 a.m.and ending at '
4:30 p.m. The regular work day beginning time may be advanced one or two hours or delayed by one hour. However, the
Employer may have the option to schedule his work week from Monday through Thursday at ten(10)hours per day at the straight
time rate of pay with all hours in excess of ten(10)hours in any one day to be at the applicable overtime rate. If the Employer '
elects to work from Monday through Thursday and is stopped due to circumstances beyond his control, inclement weather or
holiday,he shall have the option to work Friday at the straight time rate of pay to complete his forty (40)hours. If an employee
declines to work Friday as a make-up day,he shall not be penalized. All overtime work performed on Monday through Saturday
shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/z)of the hourly rate plus an amount equal to one-half('h)of the hourly Total Indicated Fringe '
Benefits. All work performed on Sundays and recognized holidays shall be paid at double(2)the hourly rate plus an amount
equal to the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits.
NO.91: Means eight(8)hours shall constitute a day's work commencing at 8:00 a.m.and ending at 4:30 p.m.,allowing one-half
('/2)hour for lunch. The option exists for the Employer to use a flexible starting time between the hours of 6:00 a.m.and 9:00 am.
The regular workweek shall consist of forty(40)hours of five(5)workdays,Monday through Friday. The workweek may consist
of four(4)ten (10)hour days from Monday through Thursday,with Friday as a make-up day. If the make-up day is a holiday,the '
employee shall be paid at the double(2)time rate. The employees shall be paid time and one-half(1'/z)for work performed before
the regular starting time or after the regular quitting time or over eight(8)hours per work day (unless working a 10-hour work
day,then time and one-half(1%2) is paid for work performed over ten (10)hours a day)or over forty(40)hours per work week.
Work performed on Saturdays,Sundays and recognized holidays shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. '
•
1 ,
ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 '
AW 14 026 OT.doc Page 3 of 4 Pages
1?
'? COLE COUNTY
• OVERTIME SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
') NO.94: Means eight(8)hours shall constitute a days work between the hours of 8:00 am. and 5:00 p.m. The regular workday
starting time of 8:00 a.m.(and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.)may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m.or delayed one(1)hour to
9:00 a.m. All work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated at one and one-half(1'/z)
times the regular pay. In the event time is lost during the work week due to weather conditions,the Employer may schedule work
on the following Saturday at straight time. All work accomplished on Sunday and holidays shall be compensated at double the
regular rate of wages.
NO. 101: Means that except as provided below,eight(8)hours a day shall constitute a standard work day,and forty(40)hours per
week shall constitute a week's work,which shall begin on Monday and end on Friday. All time worked outside of the standard work
day and on Saturday shall be classified as overtime and paid the rate of time and one-half(1%z)(except as herein provided). All time
worked on Sunday and recognized holidays shall be classified as overtime and paid at the rate of double (2)time. The regular
starting time of 8:00 a.m.(and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.)may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m.or delayed one(1)hour to
9:00 a.m. The Employer has the option of working either five(5)eight-hour days or four(4)ten-hour days to constitute a normal
forty (40)hour work week. When a four(4)ten-hour day work week is in effect,the standard work day shall be consecutive ten
'I (10)hour periods between the hours of 6:30 a.m.and 6:30 p.m. Forty(40)hours per week shall constitute a week's work Monday
through Thursday,inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control,then Friday and/or Saturday
may, at the option of the Employer, be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed ten (10)hours per day or forty (40)
hours per week. Starting time will be designated by the employer. When the five(5)day eight(8)hour work week is in effect,forty
') (40)hours per week shall constitute a week's work,Monday through Friday,inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason
J beyond the Employer's control,then Saturday may,at the option of the Employer,be worked as a make-up day;straight time not to
exceed eight(8)hours per day or forty(40)hours per week. Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost due to holidays.
'1 NO. 110: Means eight(8)hours between the hours of 8:00 a.m.and 4:30 p.m.shall constitute a work day. The starting time may
be advanced one(1)or two(2)hours. Employees shall have a lunch period of thirty(30)minutes. The Employer may provide a
lunch period of one(1)hour, and in that event,the workday shall commence at 8:00 a.m. and end at 5:00 p.m. The workweek
'? shall commence at 8:00 a.m.on Monday and shall end at 4:30 p.m. on Friday (or 5:00 p.m. on Friday if the Employer grants a
• lunch period of one(1)hour),or as adjusted by starting time change as stated above. All work performed before 8:00 a.m. and
after 4:30 p.m. (or 5:00 p.m.where one(1)hour lunch is granted for lunch)or as adjusted by starting time change as stated above
or on Saturday,except as herein provided,shall be compensated at one and one-half(1'/z)times the regular hourly rate of pay for
the work performed. All work performed on Sunday and on recognized holidays shall be compensated at double(2)the regular
j hourly rate of pay for the work performed. If an Employer is prevented from working forty(40)hours,Monday through Friday,or
any part thereof by reason of inclement weather(rain and mud),Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at
the straight time rate. The Employer shall have the option of working five eight(8)hour days or four ten(10)hour days Monday
through Friday. If an Employer elects to work five(5)eight(8)hour days during any work week,hours worked more than eight
(8)per day or forty (40) hours per week shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/z) the hourly rate Monday through Friday. If an
Employer elects to work four(4)ten(10)hour days in any week,work performed more than ten(10)hours per day or forty(40)
hours per week.shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/z)the hourly rate Monday through Friday. If an Employer is working ten(10)
j hour days and loses a day due to inclement weather, they may work ten (10) hours Friday at straight time. Friday must be
scheduled for at least eight(8)hours and no more than ten(10)hours at the straight time rate,but all hours worked over the forty
'? (40)hours Monday through Friday will be paid at time and one-half(1'/�)overtime rate.
i
1l
ti
ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14
A W 14 026 OT.doc Page 4 of 4 Pages
1
COLE COUNTY '
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE-BUILDING CONSTRUCTION •
NO.3:All work done on New Year's Day,Decoration Day,July 4th,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day and '
Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. Whenever any such holidays fall on a Sunday,the following
Monday shall be observed as a holiday.
NO.4:All work done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Thanksgiving and Christmas Day ,
shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. If any of the above holidays fall on Sunday,Monday will be observed as the
recognized holiday. If any of the above holidays fall on Saturday,Friday will be observed as the recognized holiday.
NO.5: All work that shall be done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day, ,
Thanksgiving Day,and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay.
NO.7:All work done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day,
and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. If a holiday falls on a Sunday,it shall be observed on the
following Monday. If a holiday falls on a Saturday,it shall be observed on the preceding Friday.
NO.8:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving '
Day,and Christmas Day,or the days observed in lieu of these holidays,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay.
NO. 15:All work accomplished on the recognized holidays of New Year's Day,Decoration Day(Memorial Day),Independence '
Day(Fourth of July),Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day,or days observed as these named
holidays,shall be compensated for at double(2)the regular hourly rate of wages plus fringe benefits. If a holiday falls on
Saturday,it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. If a holiday falls on a Sunday,it shall be observed on the following
Monday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day,Christmas Day,Decoration Day or Independence Day except to preserve '
life or property.
NO.23:All work done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day, '
Christmas Day and Sundays shall be recognized holidays and shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When a holiday falls •
on Sunday,the following Monday shall be considered a holiday.
NO.54:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving '
Day,the Friday after Thanksgiving Day,and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. When a holiday
falls on Saturday,it shall be observed on Friday. When a holiday falls on Sunday,it shall be observed on Monday.
NO.60: All work performed on New Year's Day,Armistice Day(Veteran's Day),Decoration Day(Memorial Day), ,
Independence Day(Fourth of July),Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. No
work shall be performed on Labor Day except when triple(3)time is paid. When a holiday falls on Saturday,Friday will be
observed as the holiday. When a holiday falls on Sunday,the following Monday shall be observed as the holiday. '
NO.66: All work performed on Sundays and the following recognized holidays,or the days observed as such,of New Year's
Day,Decoration Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day,shall be paid at double
(2)the hourly rate plus an amount equal to the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits. Whenever any such holidays fall on a
Sunday,the following Monday shall be observed as a holiday. '
NO.69: All work performed on New Year's Day,Decoration Day,July Fourth,Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day
or Christmas Day shall be compensated at double(2)their straight-time hourly rate of pay. Friday after Thanksgiving and the '
day before Christmas will also be holidays,but if the employer chooses to work these days,the employee will be paid at straight
-time rate of pay. If a holiday falls on a Sunday in a particular year,the holiday will be observed on the following Monday.
1
•
ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14
AWO14 026 BHol.doc Page I of 1 Page
Il
h
Heavy Construction Rates for REPLACEMENT PAGE Section 026
COLE County
*Effective Basic, Over-
OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits
Increase Rates Schedule Schedule
CARPENTER
Journeymen 5/07 $27.21 7 16 $9.76
Millwright 5/07 $27.21 7 16 $9.76.
Pile Driver Worker 5/07 $27.21 7 16 $9.76
11 OPERATING ENGINEER
liGroup 1 5/07 $24.10 21 5 $16.34
Group II 5/07 $23.75 21 5 $16.34
Group III 5/07 $23.55 21 5 $16.34
1 Group IV 5/07 $19.90 21 5 $16.34
Oiler-Driver 5/07 $19.90 21 5 $16.34
LABORER
LAL
eneral Laborer 5/07 $22.97 2 4 $8.78
Skilled Laborer 5/07 $23.57 2 4 $8.78
1
TRUCK DRIVER-TEAMSTER
Group 1 5/07 $25.02 22 19 $8.35
j Grou II 5/07 $25.18 22 19 $8.35
Group III 5/07 $25.17 22 19 $8.35
Group IV 5/07 $25.29 22 19 $8.35
1
1 For the occupational titles not listed on the Heavy Construction Rate Sheet, use Rates shown on the
Building Construction Rate Sheet.
1
' *Annual Incremental Increase ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 6/07
COLE COUNTY ,
OVERTIME SCHEDULE—HEAVY CONSTRUCTION
NO. 2: Means a regular workweek shall be forty (40)hours and will start on Monday and end on Friday.
The regular work day shall be either eight(8)or ten(10)hours. If a crew is prevented from working forty
(40)hours Monday through Friday,or any part thereof,by reason of inclement weather, Saturday or any
part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. Employees who are part of a ,
regular crew on a make-up day,notwithstanding the fact that they may not have been employed the entire
week,shall work Saturday at the straight time rate. A workday shift is to begin at the option of the
Employer, between 6:00 a.m. and not later than 9:00 a.m. However,the project starting time may be '
advanced or delayed if required. If workmen are required to work the enumerated holidays or days
observed as such or Sundays,they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work.
NO. 7: Means the regular work week shall start on Monday and end on Friday, except where the '
Employer elects to work Monday through Thursday,ten(10)hours per day. All work over ten (10)hours
in a day or forty(40)hours in a week shall be at the overtime rate of one and one-half(1'/z)times the
regular hourly rate. The regular work day shall be either eight(8)or ten(10)hours. If a job can't work '
forty(40)hours Monday through Friday because of inclement weather or other conditions beyond the
control of the Employer, Friday or Saturday may be worked as a make-up day at straight time(if working
4-10's). Saturday may be worked as a make-up day at straight time(if working 5-8's). Make-up days '
shall not be utilized for days lost due to holidays. A workday is to begin at the option of the Employer
but not later than 11:00 a.m. except when inclement weather,requirements of the owner or other
conditions beyond the reasonable control of the Employer prevent work. Except as worked as a make-up '
day,time on Saturday shall be worked at one and one-half(l%)times the regular rate. Work performed
on Sunday shall be paid at two(2)times the regular rate. Work performed on recognized holidays or days
observed as such,shall also be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay.
NO. 21: Means the regular workday for which employees shall be compensated at straight time hourly
rate of pay shall,unless otherwise provided for, begin at 8:00 a.m. and end at 4:30 p.m. However,the
project starting time may be advanced or delayed at the discretion of the Employer. At the discretion of '
the Employer,when working a five(5)day eight(8)hour schedule, Saturday may be used for a make-up
day. If an Employer is prohibited from working on a holiday,that employer may work the following
Saturday at the straight time rate. However,the Employer may have the option to schedule his work from '
Monday through Thursday at ten(10)hours per day at the straight time rate of pay with all hours in
excess often(10)hours in anyone day to be paid at the applicable overtime rate. If the Employer elects
to work from Monday through Thursday and is stopped due to circumstances beyond his control,he shall
have the option to work Friday or Saturday at the straight time rate of pay to complete his forty(40) ,
hours. If an Employer is prohibited from working on a holiday,that Employer may work the following
Friday or Saturday at the straight time rate. Overtime will be at one and one-half(1'/z)times the regular
rate. If workmen are required to work the enumerated holidays or days observed as such,or Sundays, '
they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work.
NO. 22: Means a regular work week of forty (40)hours will start on Monday and end on Friday. The '
regular work day shall be either eight(8)or ten(10)hours. If a crew is prevented from working forty
(40)hours Monday through Friday,or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather, Saturday or any
part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. Employees who are part of a
regular crew on a make-up day,notwithstanding the fact that they may not have been employed the entire '
week,shall work Saturday at the straight time rate. A workday is to begin between 6:00 a.m. and 9:00
a.m. However,the project starting time may be advanced or delayed if mutually agreed to by the
interested parties. For all time worked on recognized holidays,or days observed as such,double(2)time
shall be paid.
•
1
ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14
AWO14 026 HOT.doc Pagel of] Page
COLE COUNTY
• HOLIDAY SCHEDULE—HEAVY CONSTRUCTION
,i
NO. 4: All work performed on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving
Day, Christmas Day, or days observed as such, shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When a holiday
yy falls on a Sunday, Monday shall be observed.
'1 NO. 5: The following days are recognized as holidays:New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of July, Labor
Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the
'I following Monday. If a holiday falls on a Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday.No work shall
be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction. This rule is applied to
protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week, Monday through Friday; it shall be
counted as eight(8)hours toward a forty (40) hour week; however, no reimbursement for this eight(8) hours is
to be paid the workman unless worked. If workmen are required to work the above recognized holidays or days
observed as such, or Sundays,they shall receive double (2)the regular rate of pay for such work. The above
shall apply to the four 10's Monday through Thursday work week. The ten (10) hours shall be applied to the
forty(40) hour work week.
NO. 16: The following days are recognized as holidays:New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of July,
'i Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on Sunday, it shall be observed on the
following Monday. If a holiday falls on Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday.No work shall
' be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction.This rule is applied to
protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week, Monday through Friday, it shall be
counted as eight(8)hours toward the forty (40) hour week; however, no reimbursement for this eight(8) hours
is to be paid to the worker unless worked. If workers are required to work the above recognized holidays or
• days observed as such,they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work.
NO. 19: The following days are recognized as holidays:New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day,
,L. Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday,it shall be observed on the
following Monday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under
construction. This rule is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week,
Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight(8)hours toward the forty (40)hour week; however, no
reimbursement for this eight(8) hours is to be paid the workmen unless worked. An Employer working a four
(4) day,ten (10) hour schedule may use Friday as a make up day when an observed holiday occurs during the
' work week. Employees have the option to work that make up day. If workmen are required to work the above
enumerated holidays, or days observed as such,they shall receive double (2)the regular rate of pay for such
' work.
•
' AwO14026 HHoLdoc ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 Page] of l Page
OUTSIDE ELECTRICIAN •
These rates are to be used for the following counties: '
Adair,Audmin,Boone,Callaway,Camden,Carter,Chariton,Clark,Cole,Cooper,Crawford,Dent,Franklin, '
Gasconade,Howard,Howell,Iron,Jefferson,Knox,Lewis,Lincoln,Linn,Macon,Maries,Marion,Miller,Moniteau,
Monroe,Montgomery,Morgan,Oregon,Osage,Perry,Phelps,Pike,Pulaski,Putnam,Rails,Randolph,Reynolds,
Ripley,St.Charles,St.Francois,St.Louis City,St.Louis County,Ste.Genevieve,Schuyler,Scotland,Shannon,Shelby,
Sullivan,Texas,Warren,and Washington '
COMMERCIAL WORK
Occupational Title Basic Total ,
Hourly Fringe
Rate Benefits
Journeyman Lineman $31.36 $4.75 +41.3% '
Lineman Operator $27.50 $4.75 +41.3%
Groundman $21.41 $4.75 +41.3% '
OVERTIME RATE:Eight(8)hours shall constitute a work day between the hours of 7:00 am.and 4:30 p.m.Forty
(40)hours within five(5)days,Monday through Friday inclusive,shall constitute the work week.Work performed in the '
9th and l Oth hour,Monday through Friday,shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/2)the regular straight time rate of pay.
Contractor has the option to pay two(2)hours per day at the time and one-half(1'/2)the regular straight time rate of pay
between the hours of 6:00 am.and 5:30 p.m.,Monday through Friday.Work performed outside the regularly scheduled
working hours and on Saturdays,Sundays and recognized legal holidays,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid for at ,
the rate of double(2)time. •
HOLIDAY RATE:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day, '
Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When one of
the foregoing holidays falls on Sunday,it shall be celebrated on the following Monday.
UTILITY WORK ,
Occupational Title Basic Total
Hourly Fringe '
Rate Benefits
Journeyman Lineman $31.36 $4.75 +37.3% '
Lineman Operator $27.08 $4.75 +37.3%
Groundman $20.94 $4.75 +37.3%
OVERTIME RATE:Eight(8)hours shall constitute a work day between the hours of 7:00 am.and 4:30 p.m. Forty '
(40)hours within five(5)days,Monday through Friday inclusive,shall constitute the work week.Work performed in the
9th and 10th hour,Monday through Friday,shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/2)the regular straight time rate of pay.
Contractor has the option to pay two(2)hours per day at the time and one-half(1%2)the regular straight time rate of pay
between the hours of 6:00 am.and 5:30 p.m.,Monday through Friday. Worked performed in the first eight(8)hours on
Saturday shall be paid at the rate of one and eight tenths(1.8)the regular straight time rate. Work performed outside
these hours and on Sundays and recognized legal holidays,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid for at the rate of '
double(2)time.
HOLIDAY RATE:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day, •
Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When one of ,
the foregoing holidays falls on Sunday,it shall be celebrated on the following Monday.
ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 14 3/07
OUT A W 14.doc
1�
1
• AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS LAW
11
1� I, the undersigned, , of lawful age, first
l being duly sworn, state to the best of my information and belief as follows:
1. That I am employed as ,
by
2. That was awarded a public works
1� contract for Project No. 2351, Municipal Building Expansion (I.T.and
Finance).
1� 3. That I have read and am familiar with Section 290.290 RSMo (1994 as
amended)an act relating to public works contracts,which impose certain
Ij requirements upon contractors and subcontractors engaged in a public
works construction project in the State of Missouri.
• 4. That has fully complied with the
provisions and requirements of Section 290.290 RSMo (1994 as
1? amended)
' FURTHER AFFIANT SAYETH NAUGHT.
AFFIANT
1!
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20
1�
1� NOTARY PUBLIC
1� My Commission Expires:
1� STATE OF MISSOURI )
ss
COUNTY OF )
IJ
Il
l
EXCESSIVE UNEMPLOYMENT EXCEPTION CERTIFICATION
I, the undersigned, , of lawful age,
first being duly sworn, state to the best of my information and belief as follows:
1. That I am employed as , by
II
2. That was awarded a public
works contract for Project No. 2351, Municipal Building Expansion
Il (I.T. and Finance).
( 3. That I have read and am familiar with Section 290.290 RSMo (1994 as
amended)an act relating to public works contracts, which impose certain
'i requirements upon contractors and subcontractors engaged in a public
works construction project in the State of Missouri.
li 4. Although there is a period of excessive unemployment in the State of
Missouri, which requires the employment of only Missouri laborers and -
laborers from non-restrictive states on public works projects or
�? improvements, an exception applies as to the hiring of
since no Missouri
1llaborers or laborers from non-restrictive states are available or capable
of performing
FURTHER AFFIANT SAYETH NAUGHT.
AFFIANT
I
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20
Ik
NOTARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires:
,! APPROVED BY:
Director of Information Technology, City of Jefferson, MO
Il
'1 CITY OF JEFFERSON
• CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
1, THIS CONTRACT made and entered'into this day of - 2007
by and between GBH Builders, Inc. hereinafter referred to as "Contractor", and the
City of Jefferson, Missouri, a municipal corporation of the State of Missouri, hereinafter
referred to as "City".
WITNESSETH: That Whereas, the Contractor has become the lowest responsible
bidder for furnishing the supervision, labor, tools, equipment, materials and supplies
and for constructing the following City improvements:
Project No. 2351, Municipal Building Expansion (I.T. and Finance).
NOW THEREFORE, the parties to this contract agree to the following:
'l 1. Scope of Services.
JJ Contractor agrees to provide all labor, equipment, hardware and supplies to perform
the work included in the project entitled "Municipal Building Expansion (I.T. and
Finance)" in accordance with the plans and specifications on file with the Department
of Community Development.
2. Manner and time for Completion.
• Contractor agrees with the City to furnish all supervision, labor, tools, equipment,
materials and supplies necessary to perform said work at Contractor's own expense in
accordance with the contract documents and any applicable City ordinances and state
and federal laws, within One Hundred Eighty (180) calendar days from the date
Contractor is ordered to proceed, which order shall be issued by the Director of
Community Development within ten (10) days after the date of this contract.
3. Prevailing Wages.
To the extent that the work performed by Contractor is subject to prevailing wage law,
Contractor shall pay a wage of no less than the "prevailing hourly rate-of wages" for
work of a similar character in this locality, as established by Department of Labor and
Industrial Relations of the State of Missouri_, and as established by the Federal
Employment Standards of the Department of Labor. Contractor acknowledges that
Contractor knows the prevailing hourly rate of wages forthis project because Contractor
has obtained the prevailing hourly rate of wages from the contents of the current
Annual Wage Order No. 14, Section 026, Cole County- rates as set forth. The
Contractor further agrees that Contractor will keep an accurate record showing the
names and occupations of all workmen employed in connection with the work to be
' performed under the terms of this contract. The record shall show the actual wages
paid to the workmen in connection with the work to be performed under the terms of
• this contract. A copy of the record shall be delivered to the Purchasing Agent of the
Jefferson City Finance Department each week. In accordance with Section 290.250
RSMo, Contractor shall forfeit to the City Ten Dollars ($10.00) for each workman
employed, for each calendar day or portion thereof that the workman is paid less than
1
ACORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE OP IDKA OATE(MM DD/YYYY)
GBHBU-1 09/10/07
PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
Midwest Agency HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND,EXTEND OR
17 veterans Memorial Parkway ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
allon MO 63366
Phone: 636-978-6620 Fax: 636-978-7715 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC#
INSURED INSURER A: Owners Insurance Company 32700
INSURER B:
GBH Builders Inc. INSURER C:
PO BOX 945 INSURER D:
Jefferson City MO 65102
INSURER E:
COVERAGES
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED.NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANYCONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES.AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. `
INSR O'L I POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION
LTR NSRD TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER DATE(MMIDDIYY) DATE(MMIDD/YY) LIMITS
GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE S 1000000
DAMAGE TO RENTED
A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 75254226 02/17/07 02/17/08 PREMISES(E,oeoureno.I f 50000
CLAIMS MADE r OCCUR NED UP(Ar om person) S SOOO
PERSONAL d AM INJURY $ 1000000
GENERAL AGGREGATE S 2000000
OWL AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ 1000000
R
POLICY P JECO T LOC
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT S 1000000
A ANY AUTO 4625422600 02/17/07 02/17/08 (EeeoeMeN)
ALL OWNED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY $
X SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person)
X HIRED AUTOS INSURANCE MIMED
BODILY INJURY
S
X NON-OWNEDAUTOS A/ (verawkaM)
Iny�' PROPERTY DAMAGE f
(Per ersWeM)
GARAGE LIABILITY Dete11 —� AUTO ONLY-EA ACCIDENT f
ANY AUTO • OTHER THAN EA ACC $
AUTOONLY. ADD S
EXCESSIUMBRELLAUABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE S 2000000
• X OCCUR ❑CLAIMS MADE 4625422601 02/17/07 02/17/08 AGGREGATE S
S
DEDUCTIBLE S
X RETENTION $10000 S
WORKERSCOMPENSATIONAND - X WC STATS OTH-
TORYLIMITU ER
EMPLOYERS UABILITY
• IPARTNEWEXECUTIVE 75238379 02/17/07 02/17/08 E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ 500000
ANY PROPRIETOR
OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE f 500000
If yes,oeecdoe unoor
SPECIAL PROVISIONS Below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT f 500000
OTHER
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS/VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Project:Municipal Building Expansion - I.T. & Finance
CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION
SHOULD MY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION
DATE THEREOF,THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN
NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL
City of Jefferson
IMPOSE NO OBUOATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER,ITS AGENTS OR
320 East McCarty St.
Jefferson City MO 65101 REPRESENTATIVES.
A OR REPRESENTATIVE
ACORD 26(2001108) ACORD CORPORATION 1988
^4
Bond X658646954
.y
PERFOPMANCE. PAYAAENT AIKD GUARAPIM�D
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned
GBH Builders, Inc. 3441 North 10 Mile Drive Jefferson ,City MO 65109
i hereinafter,. referred Was "Contractor" and
Western-Surety- Company Y.O. -Box 5077, Sioux Falls 'SD 57117
? 800 331 6053
a Corporation organized under the laws of the. State of
SD and, authorized to, transact business in the State of
Missouri as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the
City of Jefferson City. MO hereinafterrefernedtoas"Owner'
320 East McCarty- St. Jefferson City MO 65101
in thepenal sum of 'Three Hundred Sixty Nine Thousand 'Six DOLLARS
Hundred Thirty Nine and no/100.---
�$ 369,639.00. ), lawful money.of the United States of America for the
payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves and our heirs,
executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally by,these
presents.
l
THE CONDITION OF THE FOREGOING OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT;
WHEREAS, the above 'bounded Contractor has on the 7th day
of September ,2p 07 entered Into a written contractwith the aforesaid Owner
forfumishing all materials,equipment,tools,superintendence,labor,and otherfaalities
and accessories,for the-construction of certain improvements as designated, defined
and described in the said Contract and the Conditions thereof, and In accordance with
the specrficabons and plans therefore;.a copy of said.Contract being attached hereto
and made a part hereof: Project No, 2351, Municipal'Building Expansion
(I.T. and Finance) ..
NOW THEREFORE,if the said Contractor shall and will,in all particulars,well,duly and
faithfully observe, perform and abide by each and,every covenant, condition, and part
of the said Contract,and the Conditions, Specifications, Plans, Prevailing Wage Law
and-other Contract Documents thereto attached or,by reference,made a part thereof,
according to the true intent and meaning in-each case, and if said contractor shall
. .-__ _replace_aff defective parts, material and workmanship-for-a period-of.one year--after
acceptance-by the Owner, then this obligation shall be and become null and void;
otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED FURTHER, that if the said Contractor fails to duly pay for any labor,
! materials, sustenances, provisions, provender, gasoline, lubricating oils, fuel oils,
1...
greases, coal repairs, equipment and tools consumed or used in said.work, groceries
and foodstuffs, and all insurance premiums, compensation liability, and otherwise, or f
any other supplies or materials used or consumed by such Contractor or his,their, or
its subcontractors in performance of the work contracted to be done,the Surety will pay
the same in 'any amount not exceeding the amount of this Obligation, together with I
interest as provided by law:
PROVIDED FURTHER, that the said Surety,for value received, hereby stipulates and �.
agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the
contract, or the worts to be performed thereunder, or the specifications accompanying
the same, shall in any wise affect its obligation on this.bond and it does hereby waive L...
notice of any change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the
contract, or to the work, onto the specifications: i
PROVIDED FURTHER,that if the said Contractor fails to pay the prevailing hourly rate
of wages, as shown in the attached schedule, to any workman engaged in the
construction of the improvements as designated, defined and described in the said
contract, specifications and conditions thereof,the Surety will pay the deficiency and
any penalty provided for by law which the contractor incurs by-reason of an act or
omission, in any amount not.exceeding the amount of this obligation.together with
Interest as-provided bylaw:
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF; the said Contractor has hereurito'set his hand; and the
said Surety has caused these presents to-be executed in its name, and Its corporate
seal to be hereunto affixed, by it attomey4n fact duly authorized thereunto so to do,-at
Kansas City MO On this the
lOthday of September. 20 07
Western Surety Company GBH Builders, Inca
SURETY COMPANY CONTRACTOR
BY L �OEAL) BY �Z:7_j/y EAL�'
BY Brenda L. Linze SEAL) �Y Brenda L. Linze (SILL)
Attorney intact (State Representative)._
MO Resident Agent of Surety
• (Accompany this bond with Attomey-in-fact's authority from the Surety Company
certified to include the date of the bond.)
I.
Western Surety Company
POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
Know All Men By These Presents,That WESTERN SURETY COMPANY,a South Dakota corporation,is a duly organized and existing corporation
having its principal office in the City of Sioux Falls,and State of South Dakota,and that it does by virtue of the signature and seal herein affixed hereby
make,constitute and appoint
Barbara A Miller, Brenda L Linze, J Douglas Joyce, Eric Van Buskirk, Linda L Nutt,
Lawrence S Kaminsky, Michael T Kelly, Eugene A Klein, Thomas P Latz, Thomas M English,
Michael Lee Swift, Individually
of Kansas City,MO,its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to sign,seal and execute for and on its behalf
bonds,undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature
- In Unlimited Amounts -
and to bind it thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by a duly authorized officer of the corporation and all the acts of said
Attorney,pursuant to the authority hereby given,are hereby ratified and confirmed.
This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By-Law printed on the reverse hereof,duly adopted,as indicated,by
the shareholders of the corporation.
In Witness Whereof,WESTERN SURETY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its Senior Vice President and its corporate seal to
be hereto affixed on this 23rd day of January,2007.
C'TC WESTERN SURETY COMPANY
� %.pPK1P
Paul VrBruflat,Senior Vice President
State of South Dakota
ss
County of Minnehaha
On this 23rd day of January,2007,before me personally came Paul T.Bruflat,to me known,who,being by me duly sworn,did depose and say: that
he resides in the City of Sioux Falls, State of South Dakota;that he is the Senior Vice President of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY described in and
which executed the above instrument;that he knows the seal of said corporation;that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal;that it was
so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and
acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporation.
My commission expires
+ D. KRELL f
November 30,2012 + E NOTARY PUBLIC EAS L f
$ SOUTH DAKOTA�c i
#titititi♦ti��♦•titi+tititi�ti�titititi
D.Krell,No ary Public
CERTIFICATE
I, L.Nelson, Assistant Secretary of WESTERN SURETY COMPANY do hereby certify that the Power of Attorney hereinabove set forth is still in
force,and further certify that the By-Law of the corporation printed on the reverse hereof is still in force. In testimony whereof 1 have hereunto subscribed
my name and affixed the seal of the said corporation this 1 Oth day of September 2007
•
0 WESTERN SURETY COMPANY
oaPOggl S+jo
v�SEnbFP;
L.Nelson,Assistant Secretary
Form F4280-09-06
Authorizing By-Law
ADOPTED BY THE SHAREHOLDERS OF WESTERN SURETY COMPANY •
This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By-Law duly adopted by the shareholders
of the Company.
Section 7. All bonds, policies, undertakings, Powers of Attorney, or other obligations of the corporation shall be executed in the
corporate name of the Company by the President, Secretary, and Assistant Secretary, Treasurer, or any Vice President, or by such other
officers as the Board of Directors may authorize. The President, any Vice President, Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, or the Treasurer
may appoint Attorneys in Fact or agents who shall have authority to issue bonds, policies, or undertakings in the name of the Company.
The corporate seal is not necessary for the validity of any bonds, policies, undertakings, Powers of Attorney or other obligations of the
corporation. The signature of any such officer and the corporate seal may be printed by facsimile.
•
•
1
'J the stipulated rates for an work done under this contract b the Contractor or an
• P Y Y Y
subcontractor under the Contractor.
4. Insurance.
Contractor shall procure and maintain at its own expense during the life of this contract:
IJ
(a) Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all of its employees to be
engaged in work under this contract.
IJ
(b) Contractor's Public Liability Insurance in an amount not less than
$2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single occurrence and $300,000 for any one
'J person in a single accident or occurrence, except for those claims governed by the
provisions of the Missouri Workmen's Compensation Law, Chapter 287, RSMo., and
Contractor's Property Damage Insurance in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all
Jclaims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $300,000 for any one person
in a single accident or occurrence.
'J (c) Automobile Liability Insurance in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for
all claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $300,000 for any one
person in a single accident or occurrence.
(d) Owner's Protective Liability Insurance -The Contractor shall also obtain
at its own expense and deliver to the City an Owner's Protective Liability Insurance
• Policy naming the City of Jefferson as the insured, in an amount not less than
$2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $500,000
for any one person in a single accident or occurrence,except forthose claims governed
by the provisions of the Missouri Workmen's Compensation Law, Chapter 287, RSMo.
No policy will be accepted which excludes liability for damage to underground
structures or by reason of blasting, explosion or collapse.
(e) Subcontracts-In case any or all of this work is sublet,the Contractor shall
require the Subcontractor to procure and maintain all insurance required in
Subparagraphs (a), (b), and (c) hereof and in like amounts.
(f) Scope of Insurance and Special Hazard. The insurance required under
Sub-paragraphs(b) and (c)hereof shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor
and its subcontractors, respectively, against damage claims which may arise from
operations under this contract,whether such operations be by the insured or by anyone
directly or indirectly employed by it, and also against any special hazards which may
be encountered in the performance of this contract.
NOTE: Paragraph(f)is construed to require the procurement of Contractor's protective
insurance (or contingent public liability and contingent property damage policies) by a
general contractor whose subcontractor has employees working on the project, unless
• the general public liability and property damage policy(or rider attached thereto) of the
general contractor provides adequate protection against claims arising from operations
by anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Contractor.
IJ
5. Contractor's Responsibilily for Subcontractors.
It is further agreed that Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the City for the acts
and omissions of its subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly
employed by them, as Contractor is for the acts and omissions of persons it directly
employs. Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all
subcontracts relating to this work, to bind all subcontractors to Contractor by all the
terms herein set forth, insofar as applicable to the work of subcontractors and to give
Contractor the same power regarding termination of any subcontract as the City may
'l exercise over Contractor under any provisions of this contract. Nothing contained in
JJ this contract shall create any contractual relations between any subcontractor and the
' City or between any subcontractors.
6. Liquidated Damages.
The City may deduct Five Hundred Dollars($500.00)from any amount otherwise due
under this contract for every day the Contractor fails or refuses to prosecute the work,
or any separable part thereof, with such diligence as will insure the completion by the
' time above specified, or any extension thereof, or fails to complete the work by such
time, as long as the City does not terminate the right of Contractor to proceed. It is
further provided that Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages because
of delays in the .completion of the work due to unforeseeable causes beyond
Contractor's control and without fault or negligence on Contractor's part or the part of
its agents.
7. Termination.
The City reserves the right to terminate this contract by giving at least five (5)days prior
' written notice to Contractor,without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the City
should Contractor be adjudged a bankrupt, or if Contractor should make a general
assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed for
Contractor or for any of its property, or if Contractor should persistently or repeatedly
refuse or fail to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper material, or if
Contractor should refuse or fail to make prompt payment to any person supplying labor
.' or materials forthe work underthe contract, or persistently disregard instructions of the
City or fail to observe or perform any provisions of the contract.
8. City's Right to Proceed.
In the event this contract is terminated pursuant to Paragraph 7,then the City may take
over the work and prosecute the same to completion, by contract or otherwise, and
Contractor and its sureties shall be liable to the City for any costs over the amount of
this contract thereby occasioned by the City. In any such case the City may take
possession of, and utilize in completing the work, such materials, appliances and
1 structures as may be on the work site and are necessary for completion of the work.
The foregoing provisions are in addition to, and not in limitation of, the rights of the City
under any other provisions of the contract, city ordinances, and state and federal laws.
9. Indemnity. .
To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless
the City, its elected and appointed officials, employees, and agents from and against
any and all claims,damages, losses,and expenses including attorneys'fees arising out
1
1�
of or resulting from the performance of the work, provided that any such claim,damage,
• loss or expense (1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to
,l injury to or destruction of tangible property(otherthan the Work itself)including the loss
JJ of use resulting therefrom and (2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or
omission of contractor,any subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by any
'1 of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or
�JJ not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be
construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of
indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any part y or person described in this
Paragraph.
10. Payment for Labor and Materials.
The Contractor agrees and binds itself to pay for all labor done, and for all the materials
' used in the construction of the work to be completed pursuant to this contract.
Contractor shall furnish to the City a bond to insure the payment of all materials and
labor used in the performance of this contract.'
11. Supplies.
The Contractor is hereby authorized and directed to utilize the City's sales tax
' exemption in the purchase of goods and materials for the project as set out in Section
144.062 RSMo 1994 as amended. Contractor shall keep and maintain records and
invoices of all such purchases which shall be submitted to the City.
12. Payment.
• The City hereby agrees to pay the Contractor for the work done pursuant to this
contract according to the payment schedule set forth in the Contract Documents upon
acceptance of said work by the Director of Community Development and in accordance
with the rates and/or amounts stated in the bid of Contractor dated July 20, 2007 which
are by reference made a part hereof. No partial payment to the Contractor shall
operate as approval or acceptance of work done or materials furnished hereunder. The
total amount of this contract shall not exceed Three Hundred Sixty Nine Thousand
'1 Six Hundred Thirty Nine Dollars and Zero Cents ($369,639.00).
JJ - 13. Performance and Materialman's Bonds Required.
Contractor shall provide a bond to the City before work is commenced, and no later
than ten (10) days after the execution of this contract, guaranteeing the Contractor's
performance of the work bid for, the payment of amounts due to all suppliers of labor
and materials, the payment of insurance premiums for workers compensation
J insurance and all other insurance called for under this contract, and the payment of the
prevailing wage rate to all workmen as required by this contract, said bond to be in a
form approved by the City, and to be given by such company or companies as may be
�J acceptable to the City in its sole and absolute discretion. The amount of the bond shall
be equal to the Contractor's bid.
14. Knowledge of Local Conditions.
• Contractor hereby warrants that it has examined the location of the proposed work and
the attached specifications and has fully considered such local conditions in making its
bid herein.
!J
'I
1�
•
,l 15. Severability.
JJ If any section,subsection, sentence, or clause of this Contract shall be adjudged illegal,
invalid, or unenforceable, such illegality, invalidity, or unenforceability shall not affect
'1 the legality, validity, or enforceability of the contract as a whole, or of any section,
_!! - subsection, sentence, clause, or attachment not so adjudged.
16. Governing Law.
The contract shall be Y
overned b the laws of the State of Missouri. The courts of the
9
State of Missouri shall have jurisdiction over any dispute which arises under this
contract, and each of the parties shall submit and hereby consents to such courts
exercise of jurisdiction. In any successful action by the City to enforce this contract,the
City shall be entitled to recover its attorney's fees and expenses incurred in such action.
17. Contract Documents.C a
The contract documents shall consist of the following:
a. This Contract f. General Provisions
b. Addenda g. Special Provisions
c. Information for Bidders h. Technical Specifications
d. Notice to Bidders I. Drawing and/or Sketches
e. Signed Copy of Bid
This contract and the other documents enumerated in this paragraph,form the Contract
• between the parties. These documents are as fully a part of the contract as if attached-
hereto or repeated herein.
18. Complete Understanding. Merger.
'J Parties agree that this document including those documents described in the section
J entitled "Contract Documents"represent the full and complete understanding of the
parties. This contact includes only those goods and services specifically set out. This
contract supersedes all prior contracts and understandings between the Contractor and
the City.
�J19. Authorship and Enforcement.
J Parties agree that the production of this document was the joint effort of both parties
and that the contract should not be construed as having been draft_ed by either party.
In the event that either party shall seek to enforce the terms of this contract through
litigation, the prevailing party in such action shall be entitled to receive, in addition to
any other relief, its reasonable attorneys fees, expenses and costs.
20. Amendments.
This contract may not be modified,changed or altered by any oral promise or statement
by whomsoever made; nor shall any modification of it be binding upon the City until
• such written modification shall have been approved in writing by an authorized officer
of the City. Contractor acknowledges that the City may not be responsible for paying
�I for changes or modifications that were not properly authorized.
1
2 1 Waiver o f Breech .
• W e
Failure to Exercise Rights and Waiver: Failure to insist upon strict compliance with any
�l of the terms covenants or conditions herein shall not be deemed a waiver of any such
terms, covenants or conditions, nor shall any failure at one or more times be deemed
a waiver or relinquishment at any other time or times by any right under the terms,
covenants or conditions herein.
22. Assignment.
Neither party may sell or assign its rights or responsibilities under the terms of this
agreement without the express consent of the remaining party.
'J 23. Nondiscrimination.
Contractor agrees in the performance of this contract not to discriminate on the ground
or because of race, creed, color, national origin or ancestry, sex, religion, handicap,
age, or political opinion or affiliation, against any employee of Contractor or applicant
for employment and shall include a similar provision in all subcontracts let or awarded
hereunder.
`S 24. Notices.
All notices required to be in writing may be given by first class mail addressed to City .
of Jefferson, Department of Community Development, 320 East McCarty, Jefferson
City, Missouri, 65101, and Contractor at P.O. Box 942, Jefferson City, MO 65102.
The date of delivery of any notice shall be the second full day after the day of its
• mailing.
•
�l
J
1�
1
IN WITNIJSS W EREOF,the parties hereto have set their hands and seals tlii"s
• day of , 2007.
CITY OF JEFFERSON CONTRACTOR
I
ay
ATTEST: ATTEST:
-
J ity Cle Title: Cd��jY�
APPROVED S TO FORM:
�j.
y Cou selor
J
J
'1
1
1
• PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND GUARANTEE BOND
�J
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned
'J hereinafter, referred to-as "Contractor" and
a Corporation organized under the laws of the State of
and authorized to transact business in the State of
11 as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the
hereinafter referred to as"Owner"
in the penal sum of DOLLARS
($ ), lawful money of the United States of America for the
payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves and our heirs,
executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally by these
presents.
THE CONDITION OF THE FOREGOING OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT;
IJ
WHEREAS, the above bounded Contractor has on the day
'J of ,20 ,entered into a written contract with the aforesaid Owner
forfurnishing all materials,equipment,tools,superintendence, labor, and otherfacilities
and accessories, for the construction of certain improvements as designated, defined
and described in the said Contract and the Conditions thereof, and in accordance with
the specifications and plans therefore; a copy of said Contract being attached hereto
and made a part hereof:
,J NOW THEREFORE, if the said Contractor shall and will, in all particulars,well, duly and
faithfully observe, perform and abide by each and every covenant, condition, and part
,J of the said Contract, and the Conditions, Specifications, Plans, Prevailing Wage Law
and other Contract Documents thereto attached or, by reference, made a part thereof,
according to the true intent and meaning in each case, and if said contractor shall
,J replace all defective parts, material and workmanship for a period of one year after
acceptance by the Owner, then this obligation shall be and become null and void;
i otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
I�
PROVIDED FURTHER, that if the said Contractor fails to duly pay for any labor,
�� materials, sustenances, provisions, provender, gasoline, lubricating oils, fuel oils,
greases, coal repairs, equipment and tools consumed or used in said work, groceries •
and foodstuffs, and all insurance premiums, compensation liability, and otherwise, or '
any other supplies or materials used or consumed by such Contractor or his, their, or
its subcontractors in performance of the work contracted to be done,the Surety will pay
the same in any amount not exceeding the amount of this Obligation, together with '
interest as provided by law:
PROVIDED FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and ,
agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the
contract, or the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications accompanying '
the same, shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond and it does hereby waive
notice of any change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the
contract, or to the work, or to the specifications: ,
PROVIDED FURTHER, that if the said Contractor fails to pay the prevailing hourly rate ,
of wages, as shown in the attached schedule, to any workman engaged in the
construction of the improvements as designated, defined and described in the said
contract, specifications and conditions thereof, the Surety will pay the deficiency and '
any penalty provided for by law which the contractor incurs by reason of an act or
omission, in any amount not exceeding the amount of this obligation together with
interest as provided by law: '
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the said Contractor has hereunto set his hand, and the
said Surety has caused these presents to be executed in its name, and its corporate ,
seal to be hereunto affixed, by it attorney-in-fact duly authorized thereunto so to do, at
on this the '
day of , 20 ,
SURETY COMPANY CONTRACTOR ,
BY (SEAL) BY (SEAL) '
BY (SEAL) BY (SEAL) '
Attorney-in-fact (State Representative)
(Accompany this bond with Attorney-in-fact's authority from the Surety Company '
certified to include the date of the bond.)
S FORWARD GENERAL PROVISIONS
The following Articles GP-1 through GP-49 are"General Provisions of the Contract",modified as set forth
i. in the Special Provisions.
GP-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
It is expressly understood and agreed that the Contract Documents comprise the Notice to Bidders,
Instruction to Bidders,General Provisions,Special Provisions, Bid,Contract, Performance and One Year
Guarantee Bond, Specifications, other documents listed in the Table of Contents and bound in this
Volume. Plans,all Addenda thereto issued prior to the time of opening bids for the work, all of which are
hereto attached,and other drawings,specifications,and engineering data which may be furnished by the
Contractor and approved by the Owner,together with such additional drawings which may be furnished
by the Engineer from time to time as are necessary to make clear and to define in greater detail the intent
of the specifications and drawings, are each and all component parts to the agreement governing the
work to be done and the materials equipment to be furnished. All of these documents are hereby defined
' as the Contract Documents.
The several parts of the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall
be as binding as if called for by all. The intention of the Documents is to include the furnishing of all
materials, labor,tools,equipment and supplies necessary for constructing complete and ready to use the
work specified. Materials or work described in words which so applied have a well known technical or
trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards.
Ile. The Contract shall be executed in the State and County where the Owner is located. Three (3) copies
of the contract documents shall be prepared by the Contractor, each containing an exact copy of the
Contractor's bid as submitted,the Performance Bond properly executed,a Statutory Bond where required,
' and the contract agreement signed by both parties thereto. These executed contract documents shall
be filed as follows:
One(1)with the City Clerk of the City of Jefferson
One(1)with the Jefferson City Director of Information Technology
One (1)with the Contractor
GP-2 DEFINITIONS
Wherever any work or expression defined in this article, or pronoun used in its stead, occurs in these
contract documents, it shall have and is mutually understood to have the meaning herein given:
1. "Contract"or"Contract Documents"shall include all of the documents enumerated in the previous
article.
' 2. "Owner","City", or words"Party of the First Part', shall mean the party entering into contract to
secure performance of the work covered by this Contract and his or its duly authorized officers
or agents. Generally this will be the"City of Jefferson".
3. "Contractor"or the words"Party of the Second Part"shall mean the party entering into contract
for the performance of the work covered by this contract and his duly authorized agents or legal
representatives.
4. "Subcontractors"shall mean and refer to a corporation, partnership, or individual having a direct
contract with the Contractor, for performing work at the job site.
' 5. "Engineer"shall mean the authorized representative of the Director of Community Development,
(i.e., the Engineering Division Director).
6. "Construction Representative"shall mean the engineering or technical assistant duly authorized •
by the Engineer limited to the particular duties entrusted to him or them as subsequently set forth
herein.
7. "Date of Award of Contract' or words equivalent thereto, shall mean the date upon which the
successful bidder's proposal is accepted by the City.
8. "Day" or"days", unless herein otherwise expressly defined, shall mean a calendar day or days
of twenty-four hours each. ,
9. "The work" shall mean the work to be done and the equipment, supplies and materials to be
furnished under this contract, unless some other meaning is indicated by the context. '
10. Plans or drawings' shall mean and include all drawings which may have been prepared by the
Engineer as a basis for proposals, all drawings submitted by the successful bidder with his
proposal and by the Contractor to the City, if and when approved by the Engineer, and all '
drawings submitted by the City to the Contractor during the progress of the work, as provided for
herein.
11. Whenever in these contract documents the words"as directed","as required","as permitted","as '
allowed", or words or phrases of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction,
requirement, permission, or allowance of the City and Engineer is intended.
12. Similarly the words"approved","reasonable", "suitable","acceptable","properly", "satisfactory", ,
or words of like effect and import, unless otherwise particularly specified herein, shall mean
approved,reasonable,suitable,acceptable, proper or satisfactory in the judgment of the City and
Engineer. '
13. Whenever any statement is made in these Contract Documents containing the expression"it is
understood and agreed"or any expression of the like import,such expression means the mutual '
understanding and agreement of the Contractor and the City.
14. "Missouri Highway Specifications" shall mean the latest edition of the "Missouri Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction" prepared by the Missouri Highway and Transportation '
Commission and published before the date of this contract.
15. "Consultant' shall mean the firm, company, individual, or its/his/her duly authorized '
representative(s) under separate agreement with the City of Jefferson that prepared the plans,
specifications, and other such documents for the work covered by this contract.
GP-3 THE CONTRACTOR ,
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor, has by careful examination satisfied himself as to the
nature and location of the work,the conformation of the ground,the character,quality and quantity of the '
materials to be encountered, the character of the equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and
during the prosecution of the work, the general local conditions, and all other matters which can in any
way affect the work under this Contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or
employee of the City, either before or after the execution of this contract,shall affect or modify any of the '
terms or obligations herein contained.
The relation of the Contractor to the City shall be that of an independent contractor. '
GP-4 THE ENGINEER
The Engineer shall be the City's representative during the construction period and he shall observe the ,
work in process on behalf of the City by a series of periodic visits to the job site. He shall have authority
to act on behalf of the City.
t;
• The Engineer assumes no direction of employees of the Contractor or subcontractors and no supervision
'I of the construction activities or responsibility for their safety. The Engineer's sole responsibility during
construction is to the City to endeavor to protect defects and deficiencies in the work.
Any plan or method of work suggested by the Engineer, or other representative of the City, to the
Contractor, but not specified or required, if adopted or followed by the Contractor in whole or in part, shall
be used at the risk and responsibility of the Contractor; and the Engineer and the City will assume no
responsibility therefore.
,l GP-5 BOND
Coincident with the execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish a good and sufficient surety
I! bond in the full amount of the contract sum. This surety bond, executed by the Contractor to the City,
1 shall be a guarantee: (a) for the faithful performance and completion of the work in strict accordance with
the terms and intent of the contract documents; (b) the payment of all bills and obligations arising from
this contract which might in any manner become a claim against the City; (c) for the payment to the City
,i of all sums due or which may become due by the terms of the contract, as well as by reason of any
violation thereof by the Contractor; and for a period of one year from and immediately following the
acceptance of the completed project by the City,the payment to the City of all damage loss and expense
which may occur to the City by reason of defective materials used, or by reason of defective or improper
workmanship done, in the furnishing of materials, labor, and equipment in the performance of the said
contract.
All provisions of the bond shall be complete and in full accordance with statutory requirements. The bond
shall be executed with the property sureties through a company licensed and qualified to operate in the
state and approved by the City. Bond shall be signed by an agent resident in the state and date of bond
'j shall be the date of execution of the contract.
11 • If at any time during the continuance of the contract the surety on the Contractor's bond becomes
irresponsible,the City shall have the right to require additional and sufficient sureties which the Contractor
shall furnish to the satisfaction of the City within ten(10)days after notice to do so. In default thereof,the
contract may be suspended, all payments or money due the Contractor withheld, and the contract
completed as hereinafter provided.
I
GP-6 INSURANCE
GP-6.1 GENERAL:
The Contractor shall secure, pay for and maintain during the life of the Contract, insurance of such types
and amounts as necessary to protect himself, and the City, against all hazards enumerated herein. All
policies shall be in the amounts, form and companies satisfactory to the City.
I
The insuring company shall deliver to the City certificates of all insurance required, signed by an
authorized representative and stating that all provisions of the following specified.requirements are
complied with.
All certificates of insurance required herein shall state that ten(10)days written notice will be given to the
City before the policy is canceled or changed. All certifications of insurance shall be delivered to the City
prior to the time that any operations under this contract are started.
All of said Contractor's certificates of insurance shall be written in an insurance company authorized to
do business in the State of Missouri.
• GP-6.2 BODILY INJURY LIABILITY& PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY INSURANCE
(1) Bodily Injury Liability insurance coverage providing limits for bodily injuries,including death,of not less
than $2,000,000 per person and $300,000 per occurrence.
(2) Property Damage Liability insurance coverage for limits of not less than $2,000,000 per one •
occurrence nor less than$2,000,000 aggregate to limit for the policy year.
GP-6.3 CONTRACTOR'S PROTECTIVE BODILY INJURY LIABILITY & PROTECTIVE PROPERTY
DAMAGE LIABILITY INSURANCE: (COVERING OPERATIONS OF SUBCONTRACTORS)
(1) Contractors contingent policy providing limits of at least$300,000.per person and $2,000,000 per
occurrence for bodily injury or death.
(2) Property Damage Liability providing limits of at least $2,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 '
aggregate.
GP-6.4 CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY ,
Property Damage coverage with $2,000,000 aggregate limit.
GP-6.5 OWNER'S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE '
The Contractor shall purchase and maintain Owner's Protective Liability and Property Damage insurance ,
issued in the name of the Owner and the Engineer as will protect both against any and all claims that
might arise as a result of the operations of the Contractor or his subcontractors in fulfilling this contract.
The minimum amount of such insurance shall be the same as required for Bodily Injury Liability and '
Property Damage Liability Insurance. This policy shall be filed with the Owner and a copy filed with the
Engineer.
GP-6.6 EXCLUSIONS '
The above requirements GP-6.2, 6.3,6.5 for property damage liability shall contain no exclusion relative •
to: '
(1) Blasting or explosion. (Consult Technical Specifications Part I for possible deletion of this
requirement on subject project.)
(2) Injury or destruction of property below the surface of the ground, such as wires, conduits, pipes,
mains, sewers, etc., caused by the Contractor's operations.
(3) The collapse of,or structural injury to,any building or structure on or adjacent to the City's premises, '
or injury to or destruction of property resulting therefrom, caused by the removal of other buildings,
structures, or supports, or by excavations below the surface of the ground.
GP-6.7 AUTOMOBILE BODILY INJURY LIABILITY & AUTOMOBILE PROPERTY DAMAGE ,
LIABILITY INSURANCE
Contractor shall carry in his name, additional assured clauses protecting City, Liability Insurance with ,
Bodily Injury or Death Limits of not less than$300,000 per person and $2,000,000 per occurrence, and
property damage limits of not less than $300,000 with hired car and non-owned vehicle coverage or
separate policy carrying similar limits. ,
The above is to cover the use of automobiles and trucks on and off the site of the project.
GP-6.8 EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY AND WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION '
Employer's and Workmen's Compensation Insurance as will protect him against any and all claims
resulting from injuries to and death of workmen engaged in work under this contract, and in addition the
Contractor shall carry occupational disease coverage with statutory limits, and Employer's Liability with
a limit of$300,000 per person. The "Ali State"endorsement shall be included.
■
�i
• In case any class of employees is not protected under the Workmen's Compensation Statute, the
Contractor shall provide and cause such contractor to provide adequate employer's liability coverage as
' will protect him against any claims resulting from injuries to and death of workmen engaged in work under
I
this contract.
GP-6.9 INSTALLATION FLOATER INSURANCE
This insurance shall insure and protect the Contractor and the City from all insurable risks of physical loss
or damage to materials and equipment, not otherwise covered under Builder's Risk Insurance, when in
warehouses or storage areas, during installation, during testing and until the work is accepted. It shall
be of the"All Risks"type,with coverage designed for the circumstances which may occur in the particular
work included in this contract. The coverage shall be for an amount not less than the value of the work
,i at completion, less the value of the material and equipment insured under Builder's Risk Insurance. The
value shall include the aggregate value of the City-furnished equipment and materials to be erected or
installed by the Contractor not otherwise insured under Builder's Risk Insurance.
Installation Floater Insurance shall also provide for losses, if any, to be adjusted with and made payable
to the Contractor and the City as their interests may appear.
�j
If the aggregate value of the City-furnished and Contractor-furnished equipment is less than$10,000 such
l equipment may be covered under Builder's Risk Insurance, and if so covered, this Installation Floater
Insurance may be omitted.
'j GP-6.10 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR OTHER LOSSES
For the considerations in this agreement heretofore stated, in addition to Contractor's other obligations,
�Ithe Contractor assumes full responsibility for all loss or damage from any cause whatsoever to any tools
• owned by the mechanics, any tool machinery, equipment, or motor vehicles owned or rented by the
Contractor's, his agents, sub-contractors, material men or his or their employees; to sheds or other
temporary structures, scaffolding and staging, protective fences, bridges and sidewalk hooks. The
Contractor shall also assume responsibility for all loss or damage caused by, arising out of or incident to
larceny, theft, or any cause whatsoever(except as hereinbefore provided)to the structure on which the
work of this contract and any modifications, alterations, enlargements thereto, is to be done, and to
i materials and labor connected or to be used as a part of the permanent materials,and supplies necessary
to the work.
GP-6.11 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY ON DAMAGES&CLAIMS INDEMNIFYING CITY
1 The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the City and Engineer and their officers and agents,
of and from all losses, damages,costs, expenses,judgments,or decrees whatever arising out of action
or suit that may be brought against the City or Engineer or any officer or agent of either of them, for or on
�i account of the failure,omission,or neglect of the Contractor to do and perform any of the covenants,acts,
matters,or things by this contract undertaken to be done or performed,or for the injury,death or damage
1+ caused by the negligence or alleged negligence of-the Contractor or his subcontractors or his or their
I agents, or in connection with any claim or claims based on the lawful demands of subcontractors,
workmen,material men,or suppliers of machinery and parts thereof,equipment,power tools and supplies
incurred in the fulfillment of this contract.
,) GP-6.12 NOTIFICATION IN EVENT OF LIABILITY OR DAMAGE
Upon the occurrence of any event, the liability for which is herein assumed, the Contractor agrees to
forthwith notify the City, in writing such happening, which notice shall forthwith give the details as to the
• happening,the cause as far as can be ascertained, the estimate of loss or damage done,the names of
witnesses, if any, and stating the amount of any claim.
1!
GP-7 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT •
The Contractor shall not assign or transfer this contract nor sublet it as a whole, without the written ,
consent of the City and of the Surety on the Contractor's bond. Such consent of Surety, together with
copy of assignment, shall be filed with the City. No assignment, transfer or subletting, even though '
consented to, shall relieve the Contractor of his liabilities under this contract. Should any assignee fail
to perform the work undertaken by him in a satisfactory manner, the City may at his option annul and
terminate Assignee's contract.
GP-8 SUBCONTRACTS, PRINCIPAL MATERIALS&EQUIPMENT '
Prior to the award of the contract, the Contractor shall submit for approval of the City a list of
subcontractors and the sources of the principal items of materials and equipment which he proposes to
use in the construction of the project.
The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of his '
subcontractors and of person either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and
omissions or persons directly employed by him. Any notices to the Contractor shall be considered as
notice to any affected subcontractors.
Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between any
subcontractor and the City.
No officer, agent or employee of the City, including the Engineer, shall have any power or authority '
whatsoever to bind the City or incur any obligation in its behalf to any subcontractor, material supplier or
other person in any manner whatsoever.
GP-9 OTHER CONTRACTS
•
The City reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this work. The Contractor shall afford '
other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the
execution of their work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs.
If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results on the work of any other '
contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Engineer any defect in such work that
renders it unsuitable for such proper execution and results.
His failure so to inspect and report all constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and ,
proper for the reception of his work,except as to defects which may develop in the other contractor's work
after the execution of his work.
Wherever work being done by the City's forces or by other contractors is contiguous to work covered by t
this Contract,the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be established by the Engineer,
in order to secure the completion of the various portions of the work in general harmony. '
GP-10 LEGAL RESTRICTIONS, PERMITS AND REGULATIONS
The Contractor shall procure at his own expense all necessary licenses and permits of a temporary nature
and shall give due and adequate notice to those in control of all properties which may be affected by his
operations. Rights-of-way and easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
facilities shall be provided by the City unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall give all notices and '
comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn or
specified.
GP-11 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
It is agreed that all royalties for patents or patent claims, infringement whether such patents are for
processes or devices, that might be involved in the construction or use of the work, shall be included in '
• the contract amount and the Contractor shall satisfy all demands that may be made at any time for such
' and shall be liable for any damages or claims for patent infringements,and the Contractor shall at his own
expense, defend any and all suits or proceedings that may be instituted at any time against the City for
infringement or alleged infringement of any patent or patents involved in the work,and in case of an award
of damages,the said Contractor shall pay such award;final payment to the Contractor by the City will not
be made while any such suits or claims remain unsettled.
GP-12 SCOPE AND INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS AND PLANS
' GP-12.1 GENERAL
' These Specifications and Project Plans are intended to supplement, but not necessarily duplicate each
other, and together constitute one complete set of Specifications and Plans so that any work exhibited
in the one and not in the other, shall be executed just as if it has been set forth in both, in order that the
work shall be completed according to the complete design of the Engineer.
' Should anything be omitted from the Specifications and Plans which is necessary to a clear understanding
of the work,or should it appear various instructions are in.conflict,then the Contractor shall secure written
instructions from the Engineer before proceeding with the construction affected by such omissions or
discrepancies. It is understood and agreed that the work shall be performed and completed according
to the true spirit, meaning and intent of the contract, specifications and plans.
GP-12.2 FIGURED DIMENSIONS TO GOVERN
Dimensions and elevations shown on the plans shall be accurately followed even though they differ from
1 scaled measurements. No work shown on the plans, the dimensions of which are not indicated shall be
• executed until the required dimensions have been obtained from the Engineer.
GP-12.3 CONTRACTOR TO CHECK PLANS AND SCHEDULES
tThe Contractor shall check all dimensions,elevations and quantities shown on the plans,and schedules
given to him by the Engineer, and shall notify the Engineer of any discrepancy between the plans and the
conditions on the ground, or any error or omission in plans, or in the layout as given by stakes, points, or
instructions,which he may discover in the course of the work. The Contractor will not be allowed to take
advantage of any error or omission in the plans or contract documents,as full instructions will be furnished
by the Engineer should such error or omission be discovered, and the Contractor shall carry out such
' instructions as if originally specified.
The apparent silence of the Plans and Specifications as to any detail or the apparent omission from them
of a detailed description concerning any point, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general
practices, as accepted by the particular trades or industries involved, shall be used.
GP-12.4 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
' Reference to standard specifications of any technical society,organization or association, or to codes of
local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative specification
adopted and published at the date of taking bids, unless specifically stated otherwise.
GP-13 CONSTRUCTION REPRESENTATIVE AT PROJECT
' The City may appoint or employ such "Construction Representative" as the City may deem proper, to
observe the work performed under this Contract, to the end that said work is performed, in substantial
• accordance with the plans and specifications therefor.
The Project Representative assumes no direction of employees of the Contractor or Subcontractors and
no supervision of the construction activities or responsibility for their safety. The sold duty of the Project
Representative during the construction is to the City to endeavor to protect against defects and
' deficiencies in the work.
The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of the Construction Representative •
so appointed, when the same are consistent with the obligations of this contract and the specifications ,
therefor, provided, however, that should the Contractor object to any order given by the Construction
Representative, the Contractor may make written appeal to the Engineer for his decision.
The Construction Representative and other properly authorized representatives of the City shall be free ,
at all times to perform their duties, an intimidation or attempted intimidation of any one of them by the
Contractor or by any of his employees shall be sufficient reason, if the City so decides, to annul the
contract. '
Such construction representation shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform said work
strictly in accordance with the plans and specifications or any modifications thereof as herein provided, ,
and work not so constructed shall be removed and made good by the Contractor at his own expense,and
free of all expense to the City, whenever so ordered by the Engineer, without reference to any previous
oversight in observation of work. Any defective material or workmanship may be rejected by the Engineer
at any time before the final acceptance of the work, even though the same may have been previously '
overlooked and estimated for payment.
The Construction Representative shall have no authority to permit any deviation from the plans and
specifications except on written order from the Engineer,and the Contractor will be liable for any deviation
except on such written order.
All condemned work shall be promptly taken out and replaced by satisfactory work, and all condemned ,
materials shall be promptly removed from the vicinity of the work. Should the Contractor fail or refuse to
comply with instructions in this respect the City may, upon certification by the Engineer,withhold payment
or proceed to terminate contracts as herein provided.
Reexamination of questioned work may be ordered by the Engineer, and if so ordered the work must be
uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be done in accordance with the Contract Documents,the City
shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If such work be found not in accordance with the ,
Contract Documents,the Contractor shall pay such cost, unless he shall show that defect in the work was
caused by another contractor of the City and in that event the City shall pay such cost.
The Contractor shall furnish samples of testing purposes of any material required by the Engineer, and '
shall furnish any information required concerning the nature or source of any material which he proposes
to use.
GP-14 LINES AND GRADES '
The Department of Community Development will set construction stakes establishing lines,scopes,and
continuous profile grade in road work, and center-line and bench marks for culvert work, and ,
appurtenances as may be deemed necessary, and will furnish the Contractor, with all necessary
information relating to lines, slopes, and grades, to lay out the work correctly. The Contractor shall
maintain these lines, grades, and bench marks and use them to lay out the work he is to perform under '
this contract.
The Contractor shall notify the Department of Community Development not less than 48 hours before
stakes are required. No claims shall be made because of delays if the contractors fail to give such notice.
The Contractor shall carefully preserve stakes and bench marks. If such stakes and bench mark become
damaged, lost,displaced,or removed by the Contractor,they shall be reset at his expense and deducted
from the payment for the work.
Any work done without being properly located and established by base lines,offset stakes, bench marks, •
or other basic reference points checked by the Construction Representative may be ordered removed and
replaced at the Contractor's expense.
GP-15 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MATERIALS
' The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of all materials furnished by him, and he shall
replace at his own cost and expense any and all such material found to be defective in design or
manufacture,or which has been damaged after delivery. This includes the furnishing of all materials and
labor required for replacement of any installed materials which is found to be defective at any time prior
to the expiration of one year from the date of final payment.
The manufacturer of pipe for use on this project shall certify in writing to the City that all materials
furnished for use in this project do conform to these specifications. Whenever standard tests are
conducted, he shall forward a copy of the test results to the City.
GP-16 WATER
All water required for and in connection with the work to be performed shall be provided by the Contractor
at his sole cost and expense.
' GP-17 POWER
All power for lighting, operation of the Contractor's plant or equipment or for any other use by the
Contractor, shall be provided by the Contractor at his sole cost and expense.
GP-18 SUPERINTENDENCE AND WORKMANSHIP
The Contractor shall keep on his work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any
' necessary assistants. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions
given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide proper tools and equipment and the services of all.workmen, mechanics,
' tradesmen,and other employees necessary in the construction and execution of the work contemplated
and outlined herein. The employees of the Contractor shall be competent and willing to perform
satisfactorily the work required of them. Any employee who is disorderly, intemperate or incompetent
' or who neglects or refuses to perform his work in a satisfactorily manner, shall be promptly discharged.
It is called particularly to the Contractor's attention that only first class workmanship will be acceptable.
1 GP-19 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
Whenever any street is closed,the Police Department, Fire Department, and Ambulance Services shall
be notified prior to the closing. When a portion of the project is closed to through traffic, the Contractor
shall provide proper barricades and shall mark a detour route around the section of the project if
applicable. The route of all detours shall be approved by the Director of Community Development. All
detour signing shall conform to the latest edition of the"Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices".
Throughout the project,wherever homes are served directly from a street or portion of.a street which is
' to be reconstructed under this project, the Contractor shall make every effort to provide access to each
home every night. This work shall be subsidiary to the construction and no direct payment will be made
for it.
' GP-20 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS
All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares which are closed to traffic shall be protected
by means of effective barricades on which shall be placed acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall
be located at the nearest intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section.
All open trenches and other excavations shall be provided with suitable barriers, signs, and lights to the
' extent that adequate protection is provided to the public. Obstructions, such as material piles and
equipment, shall be provided with similar warning signs and lights.
• All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated by means of warning lights at night. All lights used
for this purpose shall be kept burning from sunset to sunrise. Materials stored upon or alongside public
streets and highways shall be so placed,and the work at all times shall be so conducted,as to cause the
minimum obstruction and inconvenience to the traveling public.
All barricades, signs, lights and other protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity •
with applicable statutory requirements, and in conformance with the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control ,
Devices. All necessary barricades, signs, lights and other protective devices will be furnished, installed
and maintained by the Contractor. This work shall be subsidiary to the construction and no direct payment
will be made for it. '
GP-21 EXISTING UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS AND STRUCTURES
Pipe lines and other existing underground installations and structures in the vicinity of the work to be done ,
hereunder are indicated on the plans according to the best information available to the City. The City
does not guarantee the accuracy of such information. The Contractor shall make every effort to locate
all underground pipe lines, conduits and structures by contacting owners of underground utilities and by ,
prospecting in advance of the excavation.
Any delays to the Contractor caused by pipe lines or other underground structures or obstructions not
shown by the plans, or found in locations different than those indicated, shall not constitute a claim for ,
extra work, additional payment or damages.
No payment will be made to the Contractor for locating and protecting utilities and cooperating with their
owners, and any damages caused to the utilities by the Contractor's negligence shall be repaired entirely
at the Contractor's expense.
Utilities, other than sanitary sewers and water mains, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, must be '
moved will be moved by the utility company at no cost to the Contractor. Sanitary sewers which must be
moved shall be re-laid by the Contractor and paid for at the prices bid. Only sewers which must be moved
because of direct conflict with the storm sewer conduit will be paid for in this manner. Sewers damaged ,
by excavation but not in direct conflict with the storm sewer will be repaired at the Contractor's expense. •
GP-22 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
The Contractor shall be accountable for any damages resulting from his operations. He shall be fully ,
responsible for the protection of all persons including members of the public, employees of the City and
employees of other contractors or subcontractors and all public and private property including structures, ,
sewers and utilities above and below ground, along, beneath, above, across or near the site or sites of
the work, or other persons or property which are in any manner affected by the prosecution of the work.
The Contractor shall furnish and maintain all necessary safety equipment such as barriers,signs,warning '
lights and guards as required to provide adequate protection or persons and property.
The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to the owner or owners of public or private property and
utilities when such property is liable to injury or damage through the performance of the work, and shall ,
make all necessary arrangements with such owner or owners relative to the removal and replacement
or protection of such property or utilities.
In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the work or of adjoining property,the Contractor,without '
special instruction or authorization, is hereby permitted to act at his discretion to prevent such threatened
loss or injury,and he shall so act. Any compensation,claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency
work, shall be determined by agreement or arbitration.
The Contractor agrees to hold the City harmless from any and all loss or damages arising out of
jurisdictional labor disputes or other labor troubles of any kind that may occur during the construction or
performance of this contract.
GP-23 GUARANTEE OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP •
The Contractor hereby guarantees the work in connection with this contract against faulty materials or ,
poor workmanship during the period of one(1) year after the date of completion of the contract.
• GP-24 NO WAIVER OF RIGHTS
'I Neither observation of work by the City or any of their officials, employees, or agents, nor any order by
the City for payment of money, or any payment for, or acceptance of, the whole or any part of the work
by the City, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the City or its employees, shall
operate as a waiver of any provision of this contract, or of any power herein reserved to the City, or any
right to damages herein provided, nor shall any waiver of any breach in this contract be held to be a
waiver of any other or subsequent breach.
GP-25 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS
I If desired by the City,portions of the work may be placed in service when completed or partially completed
and the Contractor shall give proper access to the work for this purpose;but such use and operation shall
not constitute an acceptance of the work, and the Contractor shall be liable for defects due to faulty
construction until the entire work under this Contract is finally accepted and for the guarantee period
thereafter.
J GP-26 ADDITIONAL, OMITTED, OR CHANGED WORK
The Owner,without invalidating the Contract, may order additional work to be done in connection with the
Contractor may alter or deduct from the work,the Contract sum to be adjusted accordingly. All such work
shall be executed to the same standards of workmanship and performance as though therein included.
The Engineer shall have authority to make minor changes in the work, not involving cost, and not
inconsistent with the purposes of the work.
1� Except for adjustments of estimated quantities for unit price work or materials to conform to actual pay
. quantities therefor as may be provided for in the Special Conditions, all changes and alterations in the
terms or scope of the Contract shall be made under the authority of duly executed change orders issued
and signed by the Owner and accepted and signed by the Contractor. All work increasing the cost shall
be done as authorized by the Owner and ordered in writing by the Engineer,which order shall state the
location,character,amount,and method of compensation. No additional or changed work shall be made
unless in pursuance of such written order by the Engineer, and no claim for an addition to the Contract
sum shall be valid unless so ordered.
If the modification or alteration increases the amount of work to be done,and the added work or any part
thereof is of a type and character which can be properly and fairly classified under one or more unit price
items of the Proposal, then such added work or part thereof shall be paid for according to the amount
actually done and at the applicable unit price or prices therefor. Otherwise, such work shall be paid for
as"Extra Work" as hereinafter provided in this Article GP-26.
If the modification or alteration decreases the amount of work to be done, such decrease shall not
constitute the basis for a claim for damages or anticipated profits on work affected by such decrease.
�l Where the value of omitted work is not covered by applicable-unit-prices,-the Engineer shall determine
IIon an equitable basis the amount of:
1. Credit due the Owner for Contract work not done as a result of an authorized change.
2. Allowance to the Contractor for any actual loss incurred in connection with the purchase,delivery
and subsequent disposal of materials or equipment required for use on the work planned and
which could not be used in any part of the work as actually built.
3. Any other adjustment of the Contract amount where the method to be used in making such
• adjustments is not clearly defined in the contract documents.
Statements for extra work shall be rendered by the Contractor not later than fifteen (15) days after the
completion of each assignment of extra work and if found correct will be approved by the Engineer and
Ijsubmitted for payment with the next regular monthly estimate.
The Owner reserves the right to contract with any person or firm other than the Contractor for any or all •
extra work. The Contractor's attention is especially called to the fact that he shall be entitled to no claim ,
for damages or anticipated profits on any portion of the work that may be omitted.
Extra Work: '
(a) The term "Extra Work" shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required to
accomplish any change or alteration in or addition to the work shown by the Plans or reasonably implied
by the Specifications and not covered by the Contract proposal items and which is not otherwise provided ,
under this Article GP-26.
(b) The Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Engineer when authorized by
the Owner. The compensation to be paid the Contractor for performing extra work shall be determined
by one or more of the following methods:
1. Method A: By agreed unit price '
2. Method B: By agreed lump sum
3. Method C: If neither Method A or B can be agreed upon before the work is started,then the work ,
shall be by force account as per Section 109, Measurement and Payment, of the Missouri
Standard Specification for Highway Construction,as published by the Missouri State Highway and
Transportation Commission. ,
GP-27 SUSPENSION OF WORK
The Owner may at any time suspend the work, or any part thereof by giving ten (10) days notice to the '
Contractor in writing. The work shall be resumed by the Contractor within ten (10) days after the date •
fixed in the written notice from the Owner to the Contractor to do so.
But if the work, or any part thereof, shall be stopped by the notice in writing aforesaid, and if the Owner '
does not give notice in writing to the Contractor to resume within a reasonable period of time, then the
Contractor may abandon that portion of the work so suspended and he will be entitled to the estimates '
and payments for all work done on the portions abandoned, if any.
GP-28 OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK
If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this '
contract, the Owner, after ten (10) days written notice to the Contractor, may, without prejudice to any
other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the '
payment then or thereafter due the Contractor.
GP-29 OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT
If the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt, or if he should make a general assignment for the ,
benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency, or if he should
persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided,
to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials, or if he should fail to make prompt
payment to subcontractors or for material or labor, or persistently disregard laws, ordinances or the
instructions of the Engineer, or otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the
Contract, then the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the ,
Contractor five(5)days written notice,terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession
of the premises and of all materials, tools, and appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever •
method he may deem expedient.
In such case, no further payment will be made the Contractor until the work is finished. If the unpaid '
balance of the contract price shall exceed the expense of finishing the work, including compensation for
additional managerial and administrative services,such expenses shall be paid to the Contractor. If such ,
expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
1i
'i
• GP-30 CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT
'J If the work should be stopped under an order of any court, or other public authority, for a period of three
months,through no actor fault of the Contractor or of anyone employed by him,then the Contractor may,
upon five(5) days written notice to the Owner and the Engineer, stop work or terminate his contract and
recover from the Owner payment for all work executed and any loss sustained upon any plant or materials
and reasonable profit and.damages.
GP-31 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES
All loss or damage arising out of the nature of the work to be done, of from the action of the elements, or
') from floods or overflows, or from ground water, or from any unusual obstruction of difficulty,or any other
natural or existing circumstances either known or unforeseen, which may be encountered in the
prosecution of the said work,shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
GP-32 SUNDAY, HOLIDAY AND NIGHT WORK
No work shall be done between the hours of 6:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m., nor on Sundays or legal holidays,
without the written approval of the City. However, work necessary in case of emergencies or for the
,I protection of equipment or finished work may be done without the City's approval.
Night work may be established by the Contractor as a regular procedure with the written permission of
'i the City; such permission however, may be:revoked at any time by the City if the Contractor fails to
maintain adequate equipment and supervision for the proper prosecution and control of the work at night.
GP-33 UNFAVORABLE CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS
During unfavorable weather, wet ground, or other suitable construction conditions, the Contractor shall
• confine his operations to work which will not be affected adversely thereby. No portion of the work shall
,I be constructed under conditions which would affect adversely the quality or efficiency thereof, unless
I special means or precautions are taken by the Contractor to perform the work in a proper and satisfactory
manner.
GP-34 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Unless specifically provided otherwise in each case,all materials and equipment furnished for permanent
installation in the work shall be new, unused, and undamaged when installed or otherwise incorporation
,i in the work. No such material or equipment shall be used by the Contractor for any purpose other than
that intended or specified, unless such use is specifically authorized by the Engineer in each case.
GP-35 DEFENSE OF SUITS
In case any action at law or suit in equity is brought against the City or any officer or agent of them for or
on account of the failure, omission,-or-neglect of-the Contractor-to-do and perform any of the covenants,
' acts, matters, or things by this contract undertaken to be done or performed, or for the injury or damage
caused by the negligence or alleged negligence of the Contractor or his subcontractors or his or their
agents, or in connection with any claim or claims based on the lawful demands of subcontractors,
workmen, material men, or suppliers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and
supplies incurred in the fulfillment of this contract, the Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the
City and their officers and agents, of and from all losses, damages, costs, expenses, judgments, or
decrees whatever arising out of such action or suit that may be brought as aforesaid.
GP-36 CHANGE ORDER
' • Any changes or additions to the scope of work shall be through a written order from the Engineer to the
Contractor directing such changes in the work as made necessary or desirable by unforeseen conditions
or events discovered or occurring during the progress of the work.
1
GP-37 CONTRACT TIME •
The time for the completion of the work is specified and it is an essential part of the contract. The '
Contractor will not be entitled to any extension of contract time because of unsuitable weather condition
unless suspension of the work for such conditions was authorized in writing by the Engineer. '
If the time for the completion of the work is based upon working days, this time will be specified in the
contract. A working day is defined as any day when, in the judgment of the Engineer, soil and weather
conditions are such as would permit any then major operation of the project for six (6) hours or over
unless other unavoidable conditions prevent the Contractor's operation. If conditions are such as to stop
work in less than six (6) hours, the day will not be counted as a working day.
No working days will be counted from December 15 to March 15, both dates inclusive. Saturdays, '
Sundays, and City holidays will not be counted as working days any time during the year.
GP-38 CONTRACT TIME EXTENSION
The Engineer may make allowance for time lost due to causes which he deems justification for extension
of contract time. If the Contractor claims an extension of contract time on the grounds that he is unable '
to work due to causes beyond his control, he shall state his reasons in writing, furnish proof to establish
his claim and state the approximate number of days he estimates he will be delayed. Notice of intention
to claim an extension of contract time on the above grounds shall be filed with the Engineer at the time
the cause or causes occur and the claim shall be filed in writing within 30 days after the claimed cause ,
for the delay has ceased to exist.
GP-39 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Time is an essential element of the contract and it is therefore important that the work be pressed ,
vigorously to completion. Should the Contractor or in case of default the surety fail to complete the work •
within the time specified in the contract, or within such extra time as may be allowed in the manner set '
out in the preceding sections, a deduction of an amount as set out in the contract will be made for each
day and every calendar day that such contract remains uncompleted after the time allowed for the
completion. The said amount set out in the proposal is hereby agreed upon, not as a penalty but as
liquidated damages for loss to the City and the public, after the expiration of the time stipulated in the '
contract,and will be deducted from any money due the Contractor under the contract,and the Contractor
and his surety shall be liable for any and all liquidated damages. Permitting the Contractor to continue
and finish the work or any part of it after the expiration of the specified time,or after any extension of the
time, shall in no way operate as a waiver on the part of the City or any of its rights under the contract.
GP-40 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(a) BASIS FOR PAYMENT
Contractor will be paid for quantities actually constructed or performed as determined by field '
measurement (except as may be hereinafter provided) at the unit price bid for the items listed in the
schedule of the Bid or for such extra work as may be authorized and approved by the Engineer. The cost
of incidental work not listed in the schedule of the Bid but necessary for the completion of the project shall
be included in bid items.
(b) DEDUCTIONS FOR UNCORRECTED WORK
If the Engineer deems it expedient not to correct work that has been damaged or that was not done in
accordance with the Contract, an equitable deduction from the Contract price shall be made therefore. •
(c) LUMP SUM ITEMS '
Payment for each lump sum item shall be at the lump sum bid for the item, complete in place, and shall
include the costs of all labor, materials, tools, and equipment to construct the item as described herein ,
and to the limits shown on the plans.
I1
J
11
• . (d) PARTIAL PAYMENT
'1 Partial payment will be made on a monthly basis. The payment shall be based on the work that has been
found generally acceptable under the contract by the Engineer or inspector. A retainer equal to 10%of
the amount of work completed to date shall be withheld.
(e) ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT
f Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance,the Engineer will
promptly make such inspection, and when he finds the work acceptable under the Contract and the
Contract fully performed he will promptly issue a final certificate, over his own signature, stating that the
work required by this contract has been completed and is acceptable by him under the terms and.
conditions thereof, and the entire balance found to be due the Contractor, including the retained
percentage, shall be paid to the Contractor by the City of Jefferson within thirty (30) days after the date
of said final certificate.
AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE
Monies due to the Contractor will not be delivered to the Contractor without presentation to the
Department of Community Development an Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Law on
prescribed form attached to the back of these contract documents.
GP-41 RELEASE OF LIABILITY
The acceptance by the Contractor of the last payment shall operate as and shall be a release to the
Owner and every officer and agent thereof,from all claims and liability to the Contractor for anything done
') or furnished for, or relating to the work, or for any act or neglect of the Owner or of any person relating
i to or affecting the work.
GP-42 CERTIFICATIONS
GP-42.1 All suppliers of materials such as drainage pipe or handrail and all suppliers of asphaltic
' concrete or portland cement concrete mixtures shall certify in writing that the product as
supplied conforms fully with these specifications. Such certification shall be delivered
in triplicate to the Department of Community Development at least 24 hours before the
product is to be used on the project.
GP-42.2 The City, at its option, may perform or have performed such tests as may be deemed
necessary to further assure that only specified materials are incorporated into the work.
'j GP-43 LOCAL PREFERENCE
In making purchases or in letting contracts for the performance of any job or service,the purchasing agent
shall give-preference to all-firms; corporations or individuals-which maintain..offices or.places of business
within the corporate limits of the City of Jefferson, when the quality of the commodity or performance
promised is equal or better and the price quoted is the same or less.
GP-44 PREFERENCE FOR U.S.MANUFACTURED GOODS
On purchases in excess of$5,000, the City shall select products manufactured, assembled or produced
in the United States, if quantity, quality,and price are equal. Every contract for public works construction
or maintenance in excess of$5,000 shall contain a provision requesting the contractor to use American
products in the performance of the contract.
�1 GP-45 AWARD OF CONTRACT-REJECTION OF BIDS
All bidders are required to submit with bid Minority Business Enterprise Eligibility Forms for all
' subcontractors and suppliers who the contractor intends to use on the project. Compliance with this
1
requirement and the Minority Business Enterprise Program shall be a consideration for award of this
contract. '
The contract will be awarded to the lowest and best responsible bidder on the base bid proposal,
complying with the conditions of the Advertisement for bids and Specifications, providing the bid is
reasonable and it is in the interest of the City of Jefferson, Missouri to accept same. The bidder to whom ,
an award is made will be notified at the earliest possible date. The City of Jefferson, however, reserves
the right to reject any and all bids and to waive all informalities in bids received whenever such rejection
or waiver is in their interest.
GP-46 AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE WITH PUBLIC WORKS' CONTRACTS LAW
Upon completion of project and prior to final payment,each contractor and subcontractor hereunder shall '
file with the City of Jefferson, Missouri, Department of Community Development, an affidavit stating that
the contractor or subcontractor has fully complied with the provisions and requirements of Section
290.290, RSMo(1994 as amended),an act relating to public works contracts. The City of Jefferson shall ,
not issue a final payment until such affidavit is filed.
GP-47 MISSOURI LABORER REQUIREMENT
Whenever there is a period of excessive unemployment in Missouri, which is defined as any month
immediately following two consecutive calendar months during which the level of unemployment in the
State has exceeded five percent(5%)as measured by the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics in its monthly ,
publication of employment and unemployment figures, only Missouri laborers or laborers from non-
restrictive states may be hired by the contractor or subcontractors to work on this Public Works'contract.
An exception shall exist when Missouri laborers or laborers from non-restrictive states are not available
or are incapable or performing the particular type of work involved, if so certified by the contractor or ,
subcontractor hereunder and approved by the Director of Community Development of the City of
Jefferson, Missouri. Nor does this provision apply to regularly employed non-resident executive,
supervisory or technical personnel or projects where federal aid funds are being utilized in the act and this '
provision would conflict with any federal statute, rule or regulation.
Laborers from non-restrictive states means persons who are residents of a state which has not enacted
state laws restricting Missouri laborers from working on public works projects in that state,as determined '
by the Missouri Labor and Industrial Relations Commission. A Missouri laborer means any person who
has resided in Missouri for at least thirty(30)days and intends to become or remain a Missouri resident.
GP-48 LIABILITY FOR COMPLIANCE WITH PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS LAW AND '
MISSOURI LABORER REQUIREMENT
In the event a contractor or subcontractor hereunder files with the City of Jefferson an affidavit stating that ,
the contractor or subcontractor has fully complied with the provisions and requirements of Section
290.290, RSMo (1994 as amended), when in fact the contractor or subcontractor has not complied, to
the extent that any liability is assessed against the City of Jefferson, Missouri,or any additional expenses
are incurred by the City of Jefferson, Missouri, any contractor making the false statement, or whose ,
subcontractor makes a false statement, shall hold harmless and indemnify the City for any liability
assessed against it or any additional expenses incurred.
Any contractor who fails to comply with the requirements of hiring only Missouri laborers or laborers from ,
non-restrictive states,absent statutory exceptions,wheneverthere is a period of excessive unemployment
in Missouri,agrees to hold harmless and indemnify the City of Jefferson,Missouri,for any liability that may
be assessed against it or any additional expenses incurred by the City of Jefferson, Missouri, because
of the contractor or subcontractor's failure to comply.
•
END OF GENERAL PROVISIONS
Il
SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
City Project Number: 2351
Il (TAA Project Number: 0650)
Schedule of Drawings 1 Page
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100 Summary 3 Pages
01210 Allowances 3 Pages
01250 Contract Modification Procedures 4 Pages
01290 Payment Procedures 4 Pages
01310 Project Management and Coordination 7 Pages
01320 Construction Progress Documentation 3 Pages
01330 Submittal Procedures 9 Pages
i
01400 Quality Requirements 6 Pages
01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 6 Pages
01600 Product Requirements 7 Pages
' 01700 Execution Requirements 6 Pages
01731 Cutting and Patching 4 Pages
01732 Selective Demolition 6 Pages .
01770 Closeout Procedures 5 Pages
01781 Project Record Documents 3 Pages
} 01782 Operation and Maintenance Data 7 Pages
DIVISION 2—SITE CONSTRUCTION—NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 3—CONCRETE
03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 11 Pages
DIVISION 4—MASONRY
I
04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 18 Pages
DIVISION 5—METALS
05120 Structural Steel 8 Pages
05310 Steel Deck 5 Pages
05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 11 Pages
05500 Metal Fabrications 6 Pages
' DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 Rough Carpentry 4 Pages
06160 Sheathing 6 Pages
' 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 5 Pages
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0650 Page- 1
DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION i
07210 Building Insulation 5 Pages '
07531 EPDM Membrane Roofing 10 Pages
07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 8 Pages '
07920 Joint Sealants 8 Pages
DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 Steel Doors and Frames 6 Pages
08211 Flush Wood Doors 4 Pages
08331 Overhead Coiling Doors 3 Pages '
08410 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 10 Pages
08711 Door Hardware 7 Pages
08800 Glazing 8 Pages
DIVISION 9—FINISHES ,
09111 Non-load Bearing Steel Framing 4 Pages ,
09250 Gypsum Board 6 Pages
09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 6 Pages
09651 Resilient Floor Tile 5 Pages
09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 5 Pages '
09680 Carpet 5 Pages
09911 Painting 11 Pages
DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES—NOT APPLICABLE '
•
DIVISION 11 —EQUIPMENT —NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS—NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 13—SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION—NOT APPLICABLE '
DIVISION 14 -CONVEYING SYSTEMS—NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL '
15181 Hydronic Piping 2 Pages
15815 Metal Ducts 5 Pages '
15820 Duct Accessories 5 Pages
15840 Air Terminal Units 3 Pages
15855 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 3 Pages
15900 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls 3 Pages
15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 15 Pages
DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL '
16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 4 Pages
16060 Grounding and Bonding 2 Pages '
16511 Interior Lighting 2 Pages
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0650 Page-2 ,
i�
IISCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS
Il
GENERAL
G101 COVERSHEET/DESIGN TEAM/DRAWING INDEX/LOCATION MAP
ARCHITECTURAL
is DA101 DEMO FLOOR PLAN
DA301 DEMO WALL SECTION
1 j A101 FLOOR PLAN
} A102 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND ROOF PLAN
A201 BUILDING ELEVATIONS
1 A301 WALL SECTION
A501 DOOR SCHEDULE, DOOR/ FRAME TYPE, HEAD/JAMB DETAILS, FINISH SCHEDULE/
FINISH LEGEND
STRUCTURAL
'S001 STRUCTURAL NOTES AND SYMBOLS
S101 . FLOOR AND ROOF FRAMING PLAN
S501 STRUCTURAL DETAILS
1
MECHANICAL
DM101 MECHANICAL DEMO PLAN
• M101 MECHANICAL PLANS
M501 MECHANICAL DEVICE SCHEDULE
' ELECTRICAL
DE101 PARTIAL 2"D FLOOR POWER/LIGHTING DEMO PLAN
E101 PARTIAL 2"D FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN
E102 PARTIAL 2ND FLOOR POWER PLAN
E501 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND RISER DIAGRAM
ii
i�
1�
1�
l �
i�
1.� SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 0650 SOD-1
• SECTION 01100- SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
}
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
�I 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
,) 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.
2. Type of the Contract.
3. Use of premises.
4. Owner's occupancy requirements.
5. Work restrictions.
6. Specification formats and conventions.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
'l governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
•
� 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Municipal Building Expansion
1. Project Location: 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101
B. Owner: City of Jefferson
1. Owner's Representative: MEMO"
C. Architect: The Architects Alliance, 631 West Main Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101
D. The Work consists of the following:
'i
1. The Work includes demolition, cast-in-place concrete, unit masonry, structural steel, steel
deck, rough carpentry, interior architectural woodwork, sheathing, EPDM membrane
roofing, aluminum storefronts, flush wood doors, hollow metal frames, door hardware,
glazing, coiling overhead doors, gypsum board assemblies,.carpet, resilient the and base,
acoustical panel ceilings, painting, mechanical, electrical, and plumbing.
'1 1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT
1
• A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1jSUMMARY 0650 01100 - 1
1.5 USE OF PREMISES •
A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated '
on Drawings by the Contract limits.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project
site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. ,
1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public.
2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and
available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not
use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
1.6 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS ,
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period,
with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction
operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to
interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used •
facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide not less than 48 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's
operations. '
1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS '
A. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions. '
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
16-division format and CSI/CSC's"MasterFormat"numbering system.
1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-
referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers '
are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to
determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.
2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the
Specifications.
SUMMARY 0650 01100 -2 '
1.9 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
,I
PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011 WEND OF SECTION 01100
1
'j
1
1
1
1'
�J
SUMMARY 0650 01100 -3
J
1�
SECTION 01210-ALLOWANCES
I1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1� A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
II A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
J 1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have
been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual
11 materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for
evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.
B. Types of allowances include the following:
1. Unit-cost allowances.
' 2. Contingency allowance.
• C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and
handling Change Orders for allowances.
2. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices"for procedures for using unit prices.
1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final
selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be
completed to avoid delaying the Work.
1� B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections.
Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
i
D. Owner reserves the right to contract with separate contractors for work covered under
"Allowances"
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form
• specified for Change Orders.
1�
'� ALLOWANCES 0650 01210- 1
B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for •
use in fulfillment of each allowance. ,
C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of
the Work.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to ,
coordinate installation.
1.6 UNIT-COST AND LUMP SUM ALLOWANCES '
A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner '
under allowance and shall include freight,and delivery to Project site.
B. Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and '
profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance
shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.
1.7 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES ,
A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by '
Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. •
B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner
under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract '
Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs.
C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include
Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.
D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by
Change Order.
1.8 UNUSED MATERIALS ,
A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to
Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.
1. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not
economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver
unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is ,
Contractor's responsibility.
•
ALLOWANCES 0650 01210 - 2 t
PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used
PART 3- EXECUTION
i13.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return
damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and
installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with
1 related work.
'j 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance No. 1 - Brick Allowance: Include the cost of Seven Hundred Twenty Dollars
($720.00) per thousand for face brick as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry
ti Assemblies"and as shown on Drawings.
END OF SECTION 01210
�i
i
•
' ALLOWANCES 0650 01210 - 3
'I
'I
l
SECTION 01250-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
'j
PART 1 -GENERAL
,l
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
'I 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
' Contract modifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
'I 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing
allowances.
2. Division 1 Section"Unit Prices"for administrative requirements for using unit prices.
3. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling
requests for substitutions made after Contract award.
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
•
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not
!, involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,
"Architect's Supplemental Instructions."
1j 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS AND PROFIT AND OVERHEAD
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
' changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
' 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a
quotation estimating cost adjustments-to-the--Contract-Sum--and the Contract Time
necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. . Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
' CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 0650 01250 - 1
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the •
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the ,
Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to '
substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Y P q 9
Contract Time.
C. Overhead and Profit on Change Orders, Work Authorizations and Construction Change '
Directives shall be applied as follows:
1. The overhead and profit charge by the Contractor and all subcontractors shall be '
considered to include, but is not limited to: performance/payment bond, job site office
expense, incidental job burdens, truck expense including mileage, small hand tools, '
project supervision including field supervision, company benefits and general office
overhead. The percentages for overhead and profit charged on Change Orders shall be
negotiated and may vary according to the nature, extent and complexity of the work
involved. HOWEVER, THE OVERHEAD AND PROFIT FOR THE CONTRACTOR OR
SUBCONTRACTOR ACTUALLY PERFORMING THE WORK SHALL NOT EXCEED •
15%. WHEN ONE OR MORE TIERS OF SUBCONTRACTORS ARE USED, IN NO
EVENT SHALL ANY CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR RECEIVE AS ,
OVERHEAD AND PROFIT MORE THAN 7% OF THE COST OF THE WORK
PERFORMED BY ANY OF HIS SUBCONTRACTORS OR SUPPLIERS. IN NO CASE
SHALL THE TOTAL OVERHEAD AND PROFIT PAID BY THE OWNER ON ANY
CHANGE ORDER EXCEED TWENTY-THREE PERCENT (23%) OF THE COST OF '
MATERIALS, LABOR AND EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO PUT THE CHANGE ORDER
WORK IN PLACE.
THE PERCENTAGE MARK-UPS PROVIDED HEREIN ARE INTENDED TO INCLUDE ,
THE COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH ALL DELAY, DISRUPTION, EXTENDED JOB SITE
PRESENCE AND HOME OFFICE OVERHEAD RESULTING FROM THE CHANGED
WORK. ,
2. On proposals covering both increases and decreases in the amount of this contract, the
application of overhead and profit shall be on the net change in the cost of the work. '
3. The percentages for overhead and profit credit to the Owner on Change Orders that are
SOLELY decreases in the quantity of work or materials shall be negotiated, and may vary
according to the nature, extent and complexity of the work involved, but in no case shall
total overhead and profit be less than TEN PERCENT(10%).
D. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. '
1.5 ALLOWANCES •
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 0650 01250 - 2 ,
�I
A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on
• the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of
I� work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances,
mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the
allowance.
2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of
overhead costs and other margins claimed.
,I 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders
)) related to unit-cost allowances.
4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent
liquantity survey, measure, or count.
B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance
described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's
handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 15 days of receipt of the
Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject
claims submitted later than 15 days after such authorization.
1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost
amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from
what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.
2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-
priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
10 1.6 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE PROCEDURES
A. Upon the Owner's initiation of a change in the project scope, or approval of a Change Order
' Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Work Authorization for signatures of the Owner or
Architect and Contractor on the Architect's Standard Work Authorization Form.
B. Use the Contingency Allowance only as directed for the Owner's purposes, and only by Work
Authorizations which designate amounts to be charged to the allowance, as approved and
authorized by the Owner's Project Representative or Architect.
1. The Contractor's related costs for products or equipment ordered by the Owner under the
contingency allowance, including delivery, installation, insurance, equipment rental, and
similar costs are not part of the contract Sum, but shall be included and itemized with
each proposal.
2. Work Authorizations authorizing use of funds from the Contingency Allowance will include
the contractor's actual related costs plus overhead and profit as herein specified.
' 3. At Project close-out, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to
Owner by Change Order.
1.7 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
' of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
• 1.8 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
r
' CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 0650 01250 - 3
1
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA •
Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change
in the Work,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the '
Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary
to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. ,
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) '
PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used) '
END OF SECTION 01250
lei� I
i
•
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 0650 01250 -4 ,
'I
�I
• SECTION 01290- PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
J1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I
1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing handling and
processing of allowances.
2. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for
handling changes to the Contract.
3. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit
prices.
4. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative
requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule
and Submittals Schedule.
' 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
1�
1 A SCHEDULE OF VALUES
1 A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
b. Submittals Schedule.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 10
days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
• B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
'` PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0650 01290- 1
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: •
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
C. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the '
following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
C. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier. ,
f. Change Orders (numbers)that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted '
to total 100 percent.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued '
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. ,
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed. ,
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified,
include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each '
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. ,
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual '
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of
Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
•
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0650 01290- 2 '
,I
1.5 AP LICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
P
'l A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
JJ certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
,+ 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
J and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
D. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment.
Sample copies are included at.end of this Section.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before
last day of construction period covered by application.
F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien
and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
,I G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by
the previous application.
1. Submit artial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
P q
deduction for retainage, on each item.
' 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
' 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity
involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled
to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to
Owner.
H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
' coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0650 01290 - 3
4. . Products list.
5. Schedule of unit prices.
6. Submittals Schedule(preliminary if not final).
7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
9. Copies of building permits. '
10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of the Work.
11. Initial progress report. '
12. Report of preconstruction conference.
13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
14. Performance and payment bonds.
15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. ,
16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.
I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial '
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a '
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. ,
J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following: ,
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes,fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." '
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. '
PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01290
•
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0650 01290 -4 '
}
• SECTION 01310- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
'I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
,i A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
II1.2 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Coordination Drawings.
2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
3. Project meetings.
4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).
' B. Related Sections include the following
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field engineering services, including establishment.of benchmarks and
control points.
3. Division 1.Section "Closeout Procedures"for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.
,I
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
' 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and
• repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.
r
'; PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0650 01310 - 1
1
1
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees 1
at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts 1
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. ,
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
9. Project closeout activities.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with ,
consideration given to conservation of energy,water, and materials.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually '
incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials •
that are designated as Owner's property.
1.5 SUBMITTALS S
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability '
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, '
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicate required installation sequences.
C. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of
dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum
clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of
such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be
considered changes to the Contract.
2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.
3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect] will return '
one copy.
•
r
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0650 01310 -2
11
l
• a. Submit six copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and
maintenance manuals. Architect will retain up to three copies; remainder will be
' returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing.
4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those
'1 Sections.
I
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key
personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone
numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned
') to Project.
1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS
,j A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
,i 3: Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
• meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three
days of the meeting.
'i B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location.
Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
' b. Phasing.
C. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for RFIs.
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
j. Submittal procedures.
• k. Preparation of Record Documents.
I. Use of the premises and existing building.
�IM. Work restrictions.
,1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0650 01310 - 3
1
n. Owner's occupancy requirements. •
o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. '
p. Construction waste management and recycling.
q. Parking availability.
r. Office, work, and storage areas.
S. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
t. First aid.
U. Security.
V. Progress cleaning.
W. Working hours.
3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each ,
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or 1
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. The Contract Documents. 1
b. Options.
C. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders. ,
e. Purchases. •
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals. '
h. Review of mockups.
L Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility problems.
k. Time schedules. 1
I. Weather limitations.
M. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
n. Warranty requirements. '
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
U. Installation procedures. '
V. Coordination with other work.
W. Required performance results.
X. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel. '
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions. '
4. Reporting: Contractor shall record and distribute minutes of the meeting to each party
present and to parties who should have been present. •
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the '
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0650 01310-4 '
1�
1�
• D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals. Coordinate dates of
meetings with preparation of payment requests.
' 1. Attendees' In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind
schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
' 4) Deliveries.
• 5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
' 11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Status of correction of deficient items.
14) Field observations.
15) RFIs.
16) Status of proposal requests.
17) Pending changes.
18) Status of Change Orders.
19) Pending claims and disputes.
20) Documentation of information for payment requests.
' 3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute to Contractor the meeting minutes.
4. Reporting: The Contractor shall distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present
and to parties who should have been present.
a. . Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
•
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0650 01310-5
1.7 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) •
A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, '
and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the
form specified.
1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will ,
be returned with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the
following: ,
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of Contractor.
4. Name of Architect.
5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. ,
7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time ,
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
10. Contractor's signature.
11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,
Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing '
interpretation. •
a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, '
thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials,
assemblies, and attachments.
C. Hard-Copy RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A. ,
1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.
D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as ,
indicated above.
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. '
E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.
Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. ,
will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: '
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
C. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract '
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. •
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. ,
f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0650 01310 - 6 ,
Il
II
• 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
I Architect's time for response will start again.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
'1 a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within seven days of receipt of the RFI
response.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
�i Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.26. Include the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address.of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. . Date Architect's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
1'
• PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)
1 PART 3-
EXECUTION (Not Used)
1' END OF SECTION 01310
i
1
1
1
•
1
1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0650 01310 - 7
l
Il
• SECTION 01320-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
li
PART 1 - GENERAL
Ii
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
JA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1 1
1.2 SUMMARY
liA. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
jof construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Preliminary Construction Schedule.
li 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
3. Submittals Schedule.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures"for submitting the Schedule of Values.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination"for submitting and distributing
'! meeting and conference minutes.
• 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures"for submitting schedules and reports.
4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
1( inspections.
11 5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting Project Record Documents at
Project closeout.
li1.3 SUBMITTALS
li A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
i 1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
1� 2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category(action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
1! 5. Description of the Work covered.
II 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
B. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit three opaque copies.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit three � e opaque co copies of initial schedule large
P 9
enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
li
•
1�
,j CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 0650 01320- 1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .
A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, '
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones
and partial Owner occupancy.
2. Review delivery dates for products. '
3. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
4. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting
agencies. ,
5. Review time required for completion and startup procedures.
6. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
7. Review submittal requirements and procedures.
8. Review procedures for updating schedule. '
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of '
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of '
subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required
schedules and reports. '
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties •
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule '
them in proper sequence.
PART 2- PRODUCTS '
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE '
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing,fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule. '
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to
maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time '
for manufacture or fabrication.
a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule,
instead of tabulating them separately. '
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's •
Construction Schedule. '
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 0650 01320- 2 '
• 2.2 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within
ten days of date established for commencement of the Work.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
1i each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60
days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash
requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
it
ll 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
'I A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type,
Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of
the Work. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and
feedback was received since the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an
estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
PART 3- EXECUTION
'I
• 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
' schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
' 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
.assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction
activities.
• END OF SECTION 01320
' CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 0650 01320 - 3
SECTION 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures"for submitting Applications for Payment and the
Schedule of Values.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination"for submitting and distributing
meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings.
3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.
4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements"for submitting test and inspection reports.
5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties.
6. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
7. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
8. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
�! A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings WILL NOT be provided
' by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B. Coordination:. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
• and related activities that require sequential activity.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0650 01330 - 1
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for '
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of '
related construction activities.
D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as !
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if ,
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
3. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals
may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 21
days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being
returned to Contractor.
a. Structural, mechanical and electrical sections. '
E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. ,
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
06100.01.A). '
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
I. Other necessary identification.
•
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0650 01330 - 2 ,
• F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the
Contract Documents on submittals. Provide written explanation of reasons for
1 deviations on or with submittal.
f G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect
'l observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve
as final submittal.
i H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without
review, received from sources other than Contractor.
1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
'I
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Destination (To:).
} d. Source(From:).
e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
f. Category and type of submittal.
I� g. Submittal purpose and description.
h. Specification Section number and title.
i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
I. Remarks.
M. Signature of transmitter.
2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
• information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on
previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,
,1 including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related
1 submittal.
I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and.content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Approved" or "Approved as Noted" notation
from Architect's action stamp.
IlJ. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution-on-transmittal-forms.
�? K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating"Approved"or"Approved as
ll Noted" notation from Architect's action stamp"taken by Architect.
�J
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
�J
• 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
,1 A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
�i SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0650 01330 - 3
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and •
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. '
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Standard color charts. ,
e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
g. Printed performance curves.
h. Operational range diagrams. '
i. Mill reports.
j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.
k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. ,
I. Testing by recognized testing agency.
M. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
n. Notation of coordination requirements.
4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. '
5. Number of Copies: Submit eight copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return five copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project ,
Record Document.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base •
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. '
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable: '
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
C. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Design calculations.
j. Compliance with specified standards.
k. Notation of coordination requirements.
I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
M. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop •
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. '
3. Number of Copies: Submit eight opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are
required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit ten copies where copies are
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0650 01330-4
• required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain three copies;
remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record
Drawing.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
' characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit. Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
C. Sample source.
' d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
' used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
• sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
' a. Number of Samples: Submit two full sets of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
' product line. Architect will return one set of submittal with options selected.
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent
testing and inspection.
a. --Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one
Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a Project Record Sample.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
be demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of
• paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
1
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0650 01330- 5
E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written •
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include
the following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. '
2. Number and name of room or space.
3. Location within room or space.
4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies.
a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.
F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction ,
Progress Documentation."
G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment '
Procedures."
H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a ,
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying ,
products. •
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s)covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies. ,
a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. '
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Quality Requirements."
B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project
Management and Coordination."
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation." •
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0650 01330- 6 '
• D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
' and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
'I comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names
of firms and personnel certified.
F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
I
H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
' product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
I
I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
,! J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
1�
• K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project. Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
1 2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers'names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
M. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Quality Requirements."
1, N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
J agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
'! O. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
• agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
I
preparation needed for adhesion.
'I SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0650 01330 - 7
J
P. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's •
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and '
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in
Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
R. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information including, but not limited to performance
9 P 9 P � 9. , P '
and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of
assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load ,
diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations.
Include page numbers.
S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents '
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: ,
1. Preparation of substrates.
2. Required substrate tolerances.
3. Sequence of installation or erection. '
4. Required installation tolerances.
5. Required adjustments.
6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
T. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized •
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative '
making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. '
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance '
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. '
U. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. '
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for ,
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect. ,
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0650 01330-8 ,
IJ
1�
• B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
Il of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S/ACTION
1� A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or.
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved," the Work
covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the
Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.
' 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved as
Noted," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with
notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents.
Final payment depends on that compliance.
3. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal ° Not Approved, Revise
and Resubmit,"do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing,
fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the
notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
1
J a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and
Resubmit"at the Project site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
4. Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special
processing or other activity, the Architect will return the submittal marked "Action Not
Required."
,f C. Informational Submittals:.Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return
it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate
'J party.
D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be
discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
�l
1�
•
�1
'� SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0650 01330-9
• SECTION 01400-QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
' PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
' B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
' 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify. those activities. Requirements in those
Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
,, assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
• requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
' by Architect, Owner,[Construction Manager,] or authorities having jurisdiction are not
limited by provisions of this Section.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work-to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
' enforcement activities performed by Architect[or Construction Manager].
C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to
' verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing,
or operation; they are not Samples.[ Approved mockups establish the standard by which the
• Work will be judged.] .
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0650 01400- 1
D. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation •
of the Work and for completed Work.
E. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. ,
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish '
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the
most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the '
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision '
before proceeding.
1.5 SUBMITTALS '
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on ,
the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. •
B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title. '
2. Description of test and inspection.
3. Identification of applicable standards. ,
4. Identification of test and inspection methods.
5. Number of tests and inspections required.
6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. ,
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: ,
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number. ,
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting. •
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0650 01400-2 ,
1►
• 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
,I work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
• practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
1, installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall
satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
,i 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing
the Work.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction,that is acceptable to authorities.
11 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
J H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
r�
'� QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0650 01400 - 3
I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each •
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using ,
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect. ,
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work,fabrication, or construction.
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
I
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Quality-control services for earthwork, rammed aggregate pier soil
reinforcement, concrete, structural steel and masonry are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. . I
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged '
to perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work •
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities ,
having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having
jurisdiction,whether specified or not.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing ,
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in ,
writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed. '
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service ,
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including •
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal
Procedures."
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0650 01400 -4 ,
Il
li
• D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
II responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect[, Construction Manager,] and
Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and
( inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
II 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-
control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
' F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
! • 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
' 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
1. construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
` PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3- EXECUTION
,I 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
•
�I
' QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0650 01400- 5
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to •
test and inspection log for Architect's[and Construction Manager's] reference during normal ,
working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION '
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. ,
2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. ,
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services. '
END OF SECTION 01400 '
•
•
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0650 01400- 6 ,
�I
• SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
' protection facilities.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work
restrictions.
' 2. Division 1 Section"Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements.
3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity
requirements for products in those Sections.
1 1.3 DEFINITIONS
' A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.4 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.
Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not
limited to Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
' B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering
and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as
required for construction operations.
C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without
metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services
as required for construction operations.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
• electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0650 01500- 1
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities ties having jurisdiction to test and inspect each '
•
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. ,
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned '
responsibilities.
PART 2- PRODUCTS ,
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
B. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths;
regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M.
C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; ,
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
D. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature t
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel.
Keep office clean and orderly. ,
2.3 EQUIPMENT '
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. '
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited. '
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in
system and remove at end of construction.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0650 01500 -2 ,
PART 3- EXECUTION
•
,1 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
'l B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
JJ are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
,l 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
�I A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
,I B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
'i 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
'i construction.
• D. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as
,I facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a
1i drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly
from pans.
E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
...harmful effect-on completed installations or elements being installed.
'I G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
�i H. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as
• long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
�s
,� TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0650 01500 - 3
I. Electric Service: Provide electric service distribution system of sufficient size capacity, a n d ,
•
power characteristics required for construction operations. ,
1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.
J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements '
without operating entire system.
K. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install telephone line for field office. '
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line facsimile in each field office.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments. ,
b. Ambulance service.
C. Contractor's home office. ,
d. Architect's office.
e. Engineers'offices.
f. Owner's office.
g. Principal subcontractors'field and home offices. '
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone for use when away from field office. •
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION '
A. General: Comply with the following: '
1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. '
2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. '
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. ,
D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining ,
properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. •
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. '
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0650 01500 -4 '
E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
• waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
'l Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements.
ff F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
�i 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment"and not temporary facilities.
Il3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."
B. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around
! excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy
rains.
' C. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
' Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
• D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure
fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by
entrance gates. Reuse existing fencing removed during selective demolition and site clearing to
greatest extent possible. Supplement as required to enclose entire Project site.
E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
H. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration
and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.
I. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
• NFPA 241.
1. Prohibit smoking in existing facilities and construction areas.
ITEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0650 01500 - 5
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar •
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL ,
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and '
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage. '
C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than '
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. „
2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent ,
paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate
fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials
contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other
substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street '
paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during '
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01500
i
tl
1
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0650 01500 -6
it
Il
• SECTION 01600- PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1� A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
11 1.2 SUMMARY
lI A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for
i use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Allowances"for products selected under an allowance.
2. Division 1 Section "Alternates"for products selected under an alternate.
3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.
4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
• 1.3 DEFINITIONS
I
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment,""system,"and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
1 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless
i explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
' related to type, -function, dimension, in-service performance, physical' properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
1 accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
• performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
iPRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 0650 01600 - 1
i
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names •
of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each '
product.
1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals
Schedule.
2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:
a. Specification Section number and title.
b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents.
C. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
d. Manufacturer's name and address.
e. Supplier's name and address.
f. Installer's name and address.
g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. '
h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery
date.
3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 '
copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for
variations from Contract requirements.
a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and '
designations that must be established early in Contract period.
4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3
copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and •
for variations from Contract requirements.
5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt '
of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product
selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack
of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract
Documents. '
B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, '
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated. '
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 0650 01600 -2
Il
f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
'1 Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
II jurisdiction.
i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
'l Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
I. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce
indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
'i b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
II • substitution within time allocated.
C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request.
Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product
request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information
or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable
JJ product request within time allocated.
D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
11 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
'1 compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
') PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 0650 01600 - 3
1
2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products,Architect will determine which products shall be used. ,
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, '
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling: ,
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent '
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses. '
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. ,
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage: '
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. '
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight •
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.
5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of '
installation and concealment.
6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. '
7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other '
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual
manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to
Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide
more rights for Owner. ,
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. '
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 0650 01600-4 '
�J
• 1. Manufacturers Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using appropriate form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
�t 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
'I needed for a complete installation-and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
,+ selection.
• 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics"of products.
7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term or
equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2
'l "Comparable Products"Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
�j 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the
named product that complies with requirements.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
4. Manufacturers: Where-Specifications include a list of-manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
• consideration of an unnamed product.
7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the
' PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 0650 01600 - 5
specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" •
Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.
8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of
manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,
and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions
in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the
other named manufacturers.
9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established ,
Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's
sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other '
specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for proposal of product.
10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that
complies with other specified requirements. ,
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern,
density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium t
items.
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or '
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items. •
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the '
Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion
of Architect.
B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy '
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and ,
similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. •
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. ,
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 0650 01600- 6
Il
11
• 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has
been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible
with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
Il 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
II A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will
return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
li Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
11 indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
1� PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01600
1�
•
' PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 0650 01600 - 7
1�
1�
SECTION 01700- EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
'I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. General installation of products.
4. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
' 5. Progress cleaning.
6. Starting and adjusting.
7. Protection of installed construction.
8. Correction of the Work.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for
coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.
2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures"for submitting surveys.
3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and
patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work.
4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
' A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as-existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
• B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
' indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the
existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
LEXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 0650 01700 - 1
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. '
1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
a. Description of the Work.
b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. '
d. Recommended corrections.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
3. Examine roughing in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are '
to be installed.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. '
3.2 PREPARATION •
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or
relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with utilities and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to '
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown ,
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a
detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the '
Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT ,
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on •
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are '
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 0650 01700-2 ,
• B. General: Engage a Missouri registered Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer to lay out the
I� Work using accepted surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
l 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
j required dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
�j and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
'i points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
• points during construction operations.
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
rt approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
Architect before proceeding.
,i 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary-reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
1 3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
`` • 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
'I
'i EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 0650 01700 - 3
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance •
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in ,
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. '
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements. '
G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. ,
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. '
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous. '
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. ,
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. ,
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. •
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 0650 01700 -4 '
• C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the.
entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
'l E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
'I F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
,i waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
'j materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part. of the
,j construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper
i
operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and-equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
�i 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
I
• A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 0650 01700- 5
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
•
3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and
finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01700
i
•
i
1
1
1
1
I
1
•
t
1
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 0650 01700-6
1►
II
• SECTION 01731 -CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
11 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Related Sections include the following:
9
' 1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the
building.
2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
1�
1.3 DEFINITIONS
' A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other Work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after
installation of other Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days
before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include
the following information:
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate
why they cannot be avoided.
2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
1 structural" elements--and - operating components as well as changes in building's
appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated
and those that will be temporarily out of service. indicate how long services/systems will
be disrupted.
6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of
reinforcement with original structure.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 0650 01731 - 1
. 1
7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and
patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of '
unsatisfactory work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner.that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. '
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. ,
C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components
in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity ,
to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following:
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual ,
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a '
visually unsatisfactory manner.
E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential ,
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or '
damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to
void existing warranties.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS '
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. ,
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. ,
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 0650 01731 -2
PART 3- EXECUTION
•
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
,I be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
ll corrected.
'1
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
II 1
B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
') Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems to greatest
• extent possible before cutting to minimize or prevent interruption to occupied areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to.perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
'I patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
,l of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
11{{ original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
,i adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
ff with original Installer's written recommendations.
'i 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
II openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
,f diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
• where required by cutting and patching operations.
'I
,) CUTTING AND PATCHING 0650 01731 - 3
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be •
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent '
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations '
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to ,
demonstrate integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish ,
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of
patching and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing '
materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area '
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall ,
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint '
coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface •
containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-
plane surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a '
weathertight condition.
D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils. putty, and similar materials.
END OF SECTION 01731
1
•
CUTTING AND PATCHING 0650 01731 -4 ,
1
1
• SECTION 01732- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
a. Reuse existing chain link fencing to the greatest extent possible for temporary
fencing around construction site.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Summary"for use of premises and Owner-occupancy requirements.
• 2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and
environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.
3. Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching"for cutting and patching procedures.
4. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-
grade improvements.
1 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to.be removed and that are not
' otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
-1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP -
' A, Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their
contents, commemorative plaques and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be
encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and
salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
• A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: indicate the following:
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 0126 01732 - 1
1, Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending •
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. ,
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff,capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of
egress, including for occupants affected by selective demolition operations].
5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
6. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building. ,
B. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
selective demolition operations. ,
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA or Missouri Department of Natural
Resources notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling
and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. '
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and ,
procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. '
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. •
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. '
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS '
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section"Summary'. '
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far ,
as practical.
1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
a. All loose furniture, materials, tools, etc. not built-in or anchored to floor or walls.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding '
with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work. ,
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 0126 01732 -2 ,
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
• immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a
separate contract.
i
I
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
,I F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
' 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
'I 1.8 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
' PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)
' PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
•
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate_ with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
photographs.
1. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be
' reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,
materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.
E. Perform surveys-as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
• B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services
and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
': SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 0126 01732 - 3
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. •
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before '
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass
area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other
parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
3.3 PREPARATION '
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other ,
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section ,
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection separating areas of
demolition from occupied building areas to prevent sound and dust disturbance and to prevent ,
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area '
and to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas. ,
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are •
exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. '
5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling
specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required '
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished. '
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL ,
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use ,
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and •
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain. ,
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 0126 01732-4
• 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
' concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable
fire=suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
'I 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. .
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls,floors,or framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
iI during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
� protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
,I A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures
with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at
perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of
concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
• B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw,then remove masonry between saw cuts.
JC. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to
recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum.
'i 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the
methods recommended by RFCI.
Li 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
I
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site
and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
,) 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
• B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
�l
'� SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 0126 01732 -5
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. ,
•
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective '
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 01732 '
1
1
•
1
i
1
•
1
1
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 0126 01732 - 6 ,
• SECTION 01770-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
' 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Warranties.
3. Final cleaning.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment
' for Substantial and Final Completion.
• 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning of Project site.
3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
' for the Work in those Sections.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
and similar final record information.
' 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
• 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
' CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0650 01770- 1
1 i
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. •
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects. '
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or '
will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as '
incomplete is completed or corrected. Additional inspections by the Architect or his
consultants will be at the expense of the Contractor.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. '
1.4 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary ocedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final '
►Y q 9 P 9
Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment ,
Procedures." •
2. Submit"Consent of Surety to Final Payment". '
3. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance. '
4. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, '
equipment, and systems.[ Submit demonstration and training videotapes.]
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect[and Construction Manager] will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or
will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will
be issued. '
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and i
area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction •
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0650 01770 - 2 ,
Il
1� • 1 Organize list of spaces in sequential order, [starting with exterior areas first] [and]
[proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor].
11 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls,floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
I) a. Project name.
b. Date.
11
C. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
1� 1.6 WARRANTIES
1 A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within [15] <Insert number> days of
completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by
Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
II� C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
I) 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title'WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
11
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1'
I
1
1�
1� CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0650 01770 - 3
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING ,
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each ,
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, '
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and
other foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface. '
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, '
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition. ,
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts,trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; ,
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. '
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
I. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
M. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment[, elevator equipment,] and '
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. '
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure. •
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0650 01770 -4 '
l
1� Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters durin
• q P 9
construction.
Il r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
II Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
I1 with requirements for new fixtures.
IIS. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
1� excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
Il
END OF SECTION 01770
1�
1
II .
h
l
1�
J
Il
1�
_J
Ir
Il
Il
1�
11 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0650 01770 - 5
1i
• SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
' 2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
' B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for general closeout procedures.
2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
' manual requirements.
• 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents
of the Work in those Sections.
' 1.3 SUBMITTALS
' A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one (1)set of marked-up Record Prints.
' B. Record Specifications: Submit one (1) copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one (1)] of each Product Data submittal.
1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record
Product Data.
' PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
• A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and
Shop Drawings.
' PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 0650 01781 - 1
1
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies •
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, '
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be '
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup '
before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. '
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
C. Depths of foundations below first floor. '
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations. '
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. ,
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
I. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
M. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. '
3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing •
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish '
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted '
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. '
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation ,
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that '
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. '
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data and Record Drawings where •
applicable.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 0650 01781 -2 ,
• 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
,l A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
II varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
11 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
I` cannot be readily identified and recorded later..
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
" 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
I Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in
,j the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
'l Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
,I END OF SECTION 01781
•
' PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 0650 01781 -3
i
11
• SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
h
PART 1 - GENERAL
II
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1� A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1� 1.2 SUMMARY
1 A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
li 2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes,
systems and equipment.
,I
B. Related Sections include the following:
'I 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for
• operation and maintenance manuals.
2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance
II manuals.
`` 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for
operation and maintenance manuals.
II 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
1� requirements for the Work in those Sections.
II 1.3 DEFINITIONS
(( A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
1 B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Initial Submittal: Submit one (1) draft copies of each manual at least fifteen (15) days before .
'i requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and
maintenance directory. Architect will return draft copy and mark whether general scope and
content of manual are acceptable.
1! B. Final Submittal: Submit one (1) copy of each manual in final form at least fifteen (15) days
before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within fifteen (15) days after
final inspection.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0650 01782- 1
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architects comments. Submit three (3)
copies of each corrected manual within fifteen (15) days of receipt of Architect's •
comments. '
1.5 COORDINATION '
A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more
than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information ,
furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS '
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY '
A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1. List of documents. '
2. List of systems.
3. List of equipment.
4. Table of contents. '
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. '
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For •
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and r
maintenance manual.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, '
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building '
Systems."
2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for
each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a '
system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page. '
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual. •
2. Name and address of Project. ,
3. Name and address of Owner.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0650 01782 - 2 '
' 4. Date of submittal.
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name and address of Architect.
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
'i D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. if possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
' equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-
reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system. Label binders as 1 of 2, 2 of 2,
etc.
' b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of
equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
' Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
' 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating_drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0650 01782 - 3
i
1
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak. '
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage. '
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, '
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: '
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. '
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 1
2.4 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in '
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. '
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards. 1
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams. '
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. '
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics. '
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests. '
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: .
1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0650 01782 -4 '
1
� 1
' 1. Startup procedures.
•
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
! 4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
' D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls
as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL,
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
' B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
• C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
' 1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
' 4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
•
1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0650 01782 - 5
2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL •
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include '
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. '
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each ,
product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance
service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. ,
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. '
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures: '
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance. ,
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. •
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. '
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment. '
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. '
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with '
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and '
telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. '
•
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0650 01782 -6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
•
' 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
' A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that
provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
' 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an
' instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include .
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
• tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment
or systems.
'I
i F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence
,I and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings
to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section
"Project Record Documents."
'i G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures"for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
'I
I END OF SECTION 01782
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0650 01782 - 7
• SECTION 03300- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
1. Slab repairs.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Allowance"for field quality control testing and inspection.
2. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures
and administrative requirements.
• 1.3 DEFINITIONS
' A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-
furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
!; A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
' characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition-at-Project site.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop
spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
•
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0650 03300 - 1
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
•
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 '
and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete,"Sections 1 through 5.
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING '
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT '
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. '
2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES 1
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports '
from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice,"
of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. '
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. •
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0650 03300-2
2.4 ADMIXTURES
i
1� A. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in
i
hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
2. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
B. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
'i 1. Available Products:
a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.;AH Curing Compound#2 DR WB.
b. Burke by Edoco; Aqua Resin Cure.
C. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.
d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; W.B.
' Resin Cure.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-1 1-W).
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX.
g. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.
h. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear.
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or
ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
IJ
2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
' B. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for concrete with a water-
cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
' 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. Slabs (Building): Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
• 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content 540 lb/cu. yd.
3. Slump Limit: 2 inches plus or minus 1 inch.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0650 03300-3
4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 P ercent. ,
2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT '
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." '
2.10 CONCRETE MIXING '
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and '
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. '
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, '
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, '
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: '
1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. '
2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. ,
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. ,
1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads '
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
H. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
I. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0650 03300 -4
I
• J. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
I
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
i 1. Install anchor bolts and rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying
with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges."
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
�I deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by
form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.
' B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
I'I otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
i new form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
lj B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
'l C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
11' crossing reinforcing bars.
JD. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
3.5 JOINTS
'l A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
,I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0650 03300 -5
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across •
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, and at the top
of footings or floor slabs.
3. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated . Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting '
action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops
random contraction cracks.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items
is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless ,
approved by Architect. •
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to
mixture. ,
C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of ,
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that '
have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time
necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of t
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb '
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0650 03300 -6
1 E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
• physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
for three successive days, maintain: delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
'I temperature range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 de F 32 de C at time of placement. Chilled
P 9 ( 9 ) P
mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
' equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to
cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
' A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
• inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
,! texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.
C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
'! would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated, exposed to view, and surfaces to be covered
' with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile.
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly
trafficked floor surface:
3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot-long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch.
D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry
tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly
scarify surface with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0650 03300-7
1
3.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
•
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after
work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-
place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work. '
B. Equipment Pads: Provide monolithic finish to interior equipment pads by stripping forms while
concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners,
intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING '
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather '
protection during curing.
B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain
during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing
period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.
C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, and other surfaces.
D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover ,
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at •
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven '
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material
and waterproof tape.
a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to
receive floor coverings.
b. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with ,
bonding of floor covering used on Project..
2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a '
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity '
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.10 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0650 03300-8 '
1 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six month(s). Do not fill joints until
• J 9 a J
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
'i A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling
and placing.
1 1.
C. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
' sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
' honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
' 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
• operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm)
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original
concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
'I 5. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
D. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
E. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and
inspections and to submit reports.
i •
1J; CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0650 03300 -9
B. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to •
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: '
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 150 cu. yd. or
fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than four compressive-strength tests '
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least four randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than two are used. '
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. ,
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;
ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete '
mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test
for each composite sample. ,
5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture. ,
6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31 M.
a. Cast and laboratory cure one set of one and one set of two standard cylinder
specimens for each composite sample. '
7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of one laboratory-cured •
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. '
a. Test one set of one field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens
at 28 days.
b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set ,
of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age
indicated.
8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three ,
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive
strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi(3.4 MPa).
9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete '
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests.
10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may '
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete '
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting •
agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. ,
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0650 03300- 10
f -
1'
• 12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractors expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
II13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply
a with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 03300
1�
li
Ij
1
oil
II
•
1�
1
1�
'J
1�
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 0650 03300- 11
._J
Il
11
SECTION 04810- UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
1�
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
II Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
li1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1� 1. Face brick.
2. Mortar and grout.
I` 3. Masonry joint reinforcement.
I 4. Ties and anchors.
5. Embedded flashing.
6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
�i 7. Cavity-wall insulation.
B. Related.Sections include the following:
,I
I 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit
masonry.
li C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
I
1. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame,
'1 installed under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."
l
D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:
1. Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal
Fabrications."
2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 7
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and.Trim."
,I
-1.3 -DEFINITIONS- -
A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (fm) at
28 days.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810- 1
B. Dete rmin e net-area compressive stren th (f m) of mason ry from average net-area compressive ,
•
strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2
in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. '
C. Determine net-area compressive strength (fm) of masonry by testing masonry prisms according
to ASTM C 1314. '
1.5 SUBMITTALS '
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following: '
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Cast or Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit ,
required.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. ,
2. Mortar.
3. Weep holes/vents. '
D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. '
2. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label •
Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used.
3. Weep holes/vents. ,
4. Accessories embedded in masonry.
E. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with
requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. '
Provide for each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
b. For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls
within specified tolerances. ,
C. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to
ASTM C 67.
d. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations '
establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.
2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. '
4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Reinforcing bars.
6. Joint reinforcement.
7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
F. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of •
ingredients. ,
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810-2
1�
'I 1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property
• specification.
�I 2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
G. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type
' and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units,
mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to
ii Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
11 H. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be
used to comply with cold-weather requirements.
Il
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1� A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one
source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
1� B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
1► C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those
of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
1� inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable
a
• to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
II demonstrate aesthetic effects[and set quality standards for materials and execution].
1
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
2. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches
high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.
1� a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in exterior wall mockup.
b. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exterior wall
mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length
of flashing left exposed to view(omit masonry above half of flashing).
1�
C. Include veneer anchors, flashing, and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall
mockup.
3. Where masonry is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel to existing
surface, unless designated otherwise by Architect.
4. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated.
5. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
1� 6. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of
1 mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities
of workmanship.
Il a. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
II Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved
by Architect in writing.
i
IIUNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810 - 3
1
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in ,
1 PY q •
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
r
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry and glass-block units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not ,
stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting,
securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not r
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and '
contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and '
emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with
weatherproof cover. ,
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with '
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress. '
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold ,
cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least '
3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such '
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading '
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice ,
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by •
frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained
in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. '
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810 -4 ,
T
`ll
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
• deg F (4 deg C)and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7
') days after completing cleaning.
4 E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
,j AC1530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
i
2.1 MASONRY UNITS,GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified
dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will
impair the quality of completed masonry.
2.2 BRICK
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
,I 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose
unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces
finished.
2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate
special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes,
and lintels.
3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on
exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result
f in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
I
B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBX or FBS, as approved by Architect.
Ij 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 8000 psi.
2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when
tested per ASTM C 67.
3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated
"not effloresced."
4. Surface-Coating: Brick-with colors or textures produced by application of coatings shall
lI withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable
)) difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet or shall have a minimum ten
year history of successful use in Project's area.
5. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-1/2 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-1/2 inches long or
3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long, unless approved otherwise
by Architect.
6. Application: Use where brick is exposed.
7. "Match existing," Provide face brick matching color range, texture, and size of existing
• building brickwork.
8. Color and Texture: Tentative brick selection has been made, Bowerston Shale #925.
Refer to the Section 01210 for brick allowance.
i
�( UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810-5
1
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS •
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather '
construction. Provide natural color cement to produce mortar color to match existing. Provide
white cement blend for mortar color at glass block units and at stone or cast stone veneer panel
installations. ,
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, '
Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. '
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone. ,
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the
No. 16 sieve.
E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. '
F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of ,
composition indicated.
G. Water-Repellent Admixture at Glass Block Mortar: Manufacturer's standard dry mixture of
stearates, water-reducing agents, and fine aggregates intended to reduce capillarity in mortar. '
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the '
following:
a. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Hydrocide Powder. '
H. Water-Repellent Admixture at Glass Block Mortar: Liquid polymeric water-repellent mortar
admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength of mortar.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers '
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following: ,
a. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block
Mortar Admixture or Mortar Tite.
b. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 8510 Bonding Admix. ,
C. Master Builders, Inc.; Color Cure Mortar Admix or Rheomix Rheopel..
I. Water: Potable. ,
2.4 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60
(Grade 420). •
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951. '
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810-6
1. Interior Walls: Hot-di galvanized, carbon steel.
• P9
2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter.
'l 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter.
5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter.
6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet ,with prefabricated comer and tee units.
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single
pair of side rods.
2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from
materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B-2 coating.
' 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,.
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1' B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway
through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Triangular or square wires at
face of veneer shall extend at least 3 inches parallel to face of veneer.
' C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire.
2. Tie Section for Steel Frame: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of
' masonry face, made from 0.188-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
3. Connector Section for Concrete: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete
and attached to tie section; formed from 0.097-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after
fabrication.
4. Tie Section for Concrete: Triangular-shaped metal ties with dovetail tabs for inserting
into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to within 1 inch of masonry face.
' D. Limestone or Cast Stone Anchors: Fabricate dowels, cramps, and other stone anchors into
stone from stainless steel.
' E. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors
1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and
compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to cold-
formed metal studs, and as follows:
a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-ibf load in
both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of
0.05 inch (1.3 mm).
•
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810- 7
2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal •
anchor section.
a. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, '
2-3/4 inches wide by 3 inches high; with projecting tabs having slotted holes for
inserting vertical legs of wire tie specially formed to fit anchor section.
b. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long, with
screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch wide by 3-
5/8 inches long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for '
inserting wire tie.
C. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.097-
inch-thick,steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
d. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.188- '
inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
e. Available Products:
1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 213 or D/A 210 with ,
D/A 700-708.
2) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; 315-D with 316.
3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10 or DW-10HS. ,
4) Wire-Bond; 1004, Type III or RJ-711.
F. Provide one of the following Screw Anchors: ,
1. Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured
with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to
penetrate steel stud flange with not less than 3 exposed threads, and with organic ,
polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per •
ASTM B 117.
2. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon- ,
steel drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except
manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 (4.8-mm)diameter by
length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads. ,
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS '
A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.
B. Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size required, '
fabricated from 0.034-inch, galvanized steel sheet.
C. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, ,
Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat
washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions
required. ,
2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where ,
indicated or required, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as
follows: -
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810 - 8 ,
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.4 mm)thick.
• 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not
exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.
3. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and
1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. Flexible
I ' flashing shall be adhered to top of flashing inside wall.
B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use[one of] the following, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,
adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated
,j polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch.
I a. Available Products include the following:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal.
2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash.
3) Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40.
'( C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:
1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended
,i by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
JJ 2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing urethane, polysulfide or silicone
sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal
flashing and trim and remain watertight. .
• D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam. Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
' products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to
each other and to substrates.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
1 compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness required; formulated from neoprene,
i urethane or PVC.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying
with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-
'� 65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain.lateral stability in masonry wall;
size and configuration as required.
,I C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
' D. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant
polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than
depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standards.
• E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade
within the wall cavity.
,� UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810 -9
1. Provide one of the following configurations: •
a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7
inches deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar droppings.
2. Available Products: '
a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.
F. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry '
unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-
inch (3.6-mm)steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either two loops
or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated. '
2.9 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION '
A. Coordinate with Division 7 Section "Building Insulation"and provide one of the following:
1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV or X, closed-cell product ,
extruded with an integral skin.
2. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation with Increased R-Value: ASTM C 578, Type IV,
but with an aged thermal resistance (R-value)for 1-inch (25-mm)thickness of 5.6 deg F x '
h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (1.0 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C) at 5 years; closed-cell product
with a carbon-black filler and extruded with an integral skin.
3. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I (aluminum-foil-faced), Class 2
(glass-fiber-reinforced). '
B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated. •
2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS '
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing '
mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use
by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. ,
b. EaCo Chem, Inc.
C. ProSoCo, Inc.
2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated or approved by Architect and Structural Engineer.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. '
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. •
3. Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior and reinforced masonry to portland '
cement and lime.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810- 10
II
'! 4. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
5. For mortar in exterior glass block unit panels, use water-repellent admixture according to
admixture manufacturer's written instructions.
6. For pointing mortar in exterior glass block unit panels, use water-repellent admixture
' according to admixture manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish .dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
1� before delivering to Project site.
. I
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 and BIA Technical Notes 8A, Proportion
' Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type
is indicated[or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry].
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M or S.
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S or N.
3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other
II applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
j comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
' 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
• ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
�J 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
'I 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B. Before in examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify_actual
locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
11
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
1� A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness
• shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
�i
J
1� UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810 - 11
B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. '
C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut '
units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
D. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
E. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. '
F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 '
g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are
damp but not wet at time of laying.
G. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 '
inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary '
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. •
4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint '
thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.
5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than
1/8 inch. ,
6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more
than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for
warpage of units.
7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line
by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS '
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated and at special brick detailing, '
lay exposed masonry in running bond or bond pattern indicated on Drawings; do not use units
with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less •
than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with
less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. ,
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810- 12 ,
' D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
' mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh
masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar.
i
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams,
lintels, posts, and similar items.
' I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof
structure above.
' 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.
2. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,
or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches
final position.
3. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above to comply with Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow brick and concrete masonry units as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
' mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C. Set stone or cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill do_wel, anchor,
and similar holes.
1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear
water.
2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting.
- 3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.
' D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
•
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810- 13
E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint), unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 CAVITY WALLS
A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:
I
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less
than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 16 inches o.c.
horizontally and 24 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide
additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart
around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more ,
than 24 inches o.c. vertically.
a. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use ,
adjustable (two-piece) type ties to allow for differential movement regardless of
whether bed joints align.
2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. '
a. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use
adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement to allow for differential movement '
regardless of whether bed joints align.
3. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers. '
B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system approved by Architect and
Structural Engineer.
C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds '
away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove
mortar fins protruding into cavity.
D. Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches
o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for
this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in '
cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry
or other construction as shown.
1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and '
masonry.
3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.
1. Space concrete masonry reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in parapet walls. '
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and
extending 12 inches beyond openings.
a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. '
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810 - 14 '
11
Ill
) B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
11
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
1� E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at[corners,] returns,
offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
,l 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to
1` comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch in width between masonry and structural
member, unless otherwise indicated. .Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid
materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and
11 attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches
o.c. horizontally.
3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
1� A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing, concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer
• anchors to comply with the following requirements:
1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and
11 masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use at least two fasteners at
jeach anchor.
2. Embed tie sections or connector sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 1 1/2
inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and
down.
1
A. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches
o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area. Install
additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches,
around perimeter.
3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
' A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.
Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-
plane wall or partition movement.
1 B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
' 1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard control joint block.
2. Rack out mortar joint for application of backer rod and sealant.
• C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows:
' UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810 - 15
1. Form open joint full depth of brick he and of width not less than 3/8 inch or more than '
P J P •
5/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants." '
D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by inserting a compressible filler of width required
for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," not less '
than 3/8 inch or more than 1/2 inch.
1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.
3.10 FLASHING,WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE,AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, '
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where otherwise required to prevent
water penetration through walls. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to '
upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could '
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal t
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe,
turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the '
interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of wall is to receive furring •
or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and turn flashing up
approximately 2 inches on interior face. '
3. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind
veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under building
paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches.
4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each '
end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2
inches to form end dams.
5. Install metal drip edges with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to ,
form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for application indicated.
6. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of '
metal drip edge.
C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be '
built into masonry.
D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above
embedded flashing and as follows: ,
1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.
2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking '
down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.
3. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c.
•
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810 - 16 '
1l
I
E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity
• drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories"Article.
'! F. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at 48 inch o.c. spacing. Use specified weep/vent
products to form vents.
') 3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
'j reinforced masonry elements during construction.
' 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,
tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
1� B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 61TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
,j strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
• 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
i
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent testing agency and inspectors to perform
inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as
,J needed to perform inspections.
1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
2. Start brick veneer coursing at all ledges, lintels, etc. only after inspectors have verified
installation of all flashing materials, etc.
' B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:
' 1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.
2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
' C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq.ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
' D. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per[ASTM C 780. Test mortar for
mortar air content and compressive strength.
• E. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.
r
' UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810 - 17
provided, r '
F. Prism Test: For each type of construction p ded, pe A STM C 1314 at 7 days y and at 28 •
days. '
3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING,AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise ,
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. '
B. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: '
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape '
hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering '
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by '
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes
20. If necessary and with approval clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner
applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. ,
6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to •
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
7. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions. '
8. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone
Handbook."
3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL ,
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's '
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess masonry waste and other masonry waste, and legally
dispose of off Owner's property. '
END OF SECTION 04810 '
•
r
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0650 04810 - 18 '
1
• SECTION 05120-STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1�
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of'the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
' 1.2 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes structural steel.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Allowance"for field quality control testing and inspection.
2. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures
' and administrative requirements.
3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for loose steel bearing plates and miscellaneous
steel framing.
4. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs"for pre-assembled steel pan stairs.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
' A. Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections required by the Contract
Documents to be selected or completed by the fabricator to withstand design loadings indicated.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified professional engineer .
to prepare calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for structural steel
connections.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
' A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components.
' 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
- 2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld.
' 3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify high-strength bolted slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing
• connections.
4. Refer to the structural drawings for additional requirements.
' STRUCTURAL STEEL 0650 05120 - 1
1
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel '
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance. '
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to
that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work. '
C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design (LFRD) Specification for Structural Steel '
Buildings" or "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings — Allowable Stress Design and
Plastic Design."
2. AISC's "Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single-Angle Members" '
or"Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members."
3. ASTM A 6 "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes,
Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use." ,
4. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Load and Resistance Factor
Design Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" or
"Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
5. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," dated March 7, '
2000, except as modified as follows:
a. Section 3.1.2; modify the end of the last sentence to read "...Owner's Designated '
Representative for Design for review." •
b. Section 3.3; delete the last paragraph.
C. Section 3.4; replace with "Design Drawings shall be clearly legible and shall be
drawn to a scale that is adequate to clearly convey the information." ,
d. Section 4.4; replace with "Review of submittals will be in accordance with
requirements in the appropriate Division 1 Specification section.
e. Section 4.4.1; in item (b)delete the words"and approved". ,
f. Section 8.5.5; replace with "The Fabricator and the Erector shall be informed by
the Owner's Designated Representative for Construction of deficiencies promptly
after the inspection. The necessary corrective work shall be performed in a timely
manner." ,
g. Section 10.2.7; replace with "Unless otherwise required by the Contract
Documents, stamped & raised manufacturer's identification marks need not be
filled, ground or otherwise removed."
D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to '
practice in the state of Missouri and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the
kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for projects with structural
steel framing that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
E. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code- '
-Steel."
1. Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. '
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .
STRUCTURAL STEEL 0650 05120-2 ,
A. Deliver structural steel to Protect site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of
• 1 q Y
installation.
'I B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged
materials from erosion and deterioration.
JJ1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become
dry or rusty before use.
2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to
members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as
directed.
1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying
the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for
installation.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Wide Flange Shapes: As follows:
• 1. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel: ASTM A 572 , Grade 50.
B. Structural Steel Angles, Channels, Plates and Bars: As follows:
,i 1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A36.
J C. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Shapes: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
D. Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: As follows:
1. Unheaded Rods: ASTM A36.
'I 2. Washers: ASTM A 36.
J E. Nonhigh-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A; carbon-steel, hex-head
bolts; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
F. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts,
heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
'I 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325.
• a. Finish: Plain, uncoated.
,� STRUCTURAL STEEL 0650 05120 - 3
3. "Twist off' Type Tension Control: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, Heavy hex steel structural •
bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers may be '
substituted at Contractor's option.
G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
1. Minimum strength level: 70 ksi. '
2.2 PRIMER '
A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead-and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer. '
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
2.3 GROUT '
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining
grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, '
plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable
for application, and a 30-minute working time.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural '
steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings. •
1. Camber structural steel members where indicated. '
2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 and maintain markings until
steel has been erected.
3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. ,
4. Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling
of structural steel.
5. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-
priming operations. '
6. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges"for structural steel.
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. '
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded.
C. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in bearing. '
2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Load and Resistance Factor '
Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" or "Specifications
for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
1. Bolts: ASTM A 325 high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated. •
2. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless otherwise indicated. '
STRUCTURAL STEEL 0650 05120 -4 ,
' B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds,
• and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without warp.
' 2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally
exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface
bleeding of back-side welding on.exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet
welds 1/2 inch (13 mm)and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:
1
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
' members to a depth of 2 inches(50 mm).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
' 4. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC specifications as follows:
1. SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning."
2. SSPC-SP 5 "White Metal Blast Cleaning."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
• instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than
' 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges,
and exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2.7 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
' indicated for galvanizing according to ASTM A 123. Galvanize the following structural steel
items:
' 1. Components embedded in exterior exposed concrete or mortar
2. Components supporting exterior masonry
' 3. Components within a roof system, above the roof deck.
4. Components exposed to the exterior.
5. As noted on the drawings.
' 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
' A. Contractor shall engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop
inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
• 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test
specimens comply with or deviate from requirements.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 0650 05120 - 5
2. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel Work is being •
fabricated or produced so required inspection and testing can be accomplished. ,
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports
indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Test results will be reported in writing to General Contractor, Architect, Structural Engineer, and ,
Contractor within 24 hours of testing.
D. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of '
corrected Work with specified requirements.
E. Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Load and
Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"
or"Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.'
1. Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959, Table 2. '
F. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be inspected and tested according
to AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's option. '
1. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
2. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level"2-2T." '
3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
PART 3- EXECUTION
•
3.1 EXAMINATION ,
A. Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of concrete and '
masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with requirements.
B. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural ,
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. '
3.3 ERECTION
A. Maintain structure in a safe, stable configuration at all times.
B. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC '
specifications referenced in this Section.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 0650 05120 -6 ,
11
liC. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface
of base and bearing plates.
1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as
required.
2. Leveling plates will be allowed at Contractor's option.
i 3. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do
not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing
�) plate prior to packing with grout.
4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish
exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.
II a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for proprietary grout materials.
JJ D. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
E. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be
in permanent contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in
elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature
of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and
lie P Y
mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service.
F. Splice members only where indicated.
G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must
be enlarged to admit bolts.
1 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
_! A. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's"Load and Resistance Factor Design
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" or "Specifications for
Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
1. Bolts: ASTM A 325 high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, direct-tension, or
tensioned shear/bearing connections.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds,
1 and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of
temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field
welds.
• 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without warp.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 0650 05120 -7
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTRO L •
A. Contractor shall engage an Owner approved and qualified independent testing and inspecting '
agency to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
Work complies with or deviates from requirements.
B. Allowance: Contractor shall include an allowance in their Base Bid to cover the direct costs of
the approved Testing and Inspection Agency. Any contractor overhead and profit shall be a
part of the base bid but not included as part of the allowance. No contractor overhead and profit
will be allowed to be included on the Testing and Inspection Agency direct costs. Refer to
Section 01210—Allowances. ,
C. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports
indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Test results will be reported in writing to General Contractor, Architect, Structural Engineer, and ,
Contractor within 24 hours of testing.
E. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of '
corrected Work with specified requirements.
F. Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Load and '
Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"
or"Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
1. Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959, Table 2. '
•
G. In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections will be inspected and tested according
to AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's option. Refer to
the structural drawings for required testing.
1. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
2. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level "2-2T."
3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for
shop painting. '
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils(0.038 mm).
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply '
galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05120 i
•
STRUCTURAL STEEL 0650 05120- 8
SECTION 05310- STEEL DECK
PART 1 - GENERAL
') 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
'l Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
'I 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
'i 1. Roof decks.
2. Noncomposite form deck.
'I B. Related Sections include the following:
'j 1. Division 1 Section "Allowance"for field quality control testing and inspection.
2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"for concrete fill and reinforcing steel.
3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous
steel shapes.
4. Division 9 Section "Painting"for repair painting of painted deck.
•
' 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing
channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other
construction.
it C. Product Certificates: Signed by steel deck manufacturers certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
' D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�j
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed steel deck similar in
' material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
._J
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-
-Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel."
C. AISI Specifications: Calculate structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's
"Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
'�� STEEL DECK 0650 05310- 1
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ,
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and •
handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. ,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ,
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering '
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel Deck: '
a. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
b. Epic Metals Corp. '
C. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Div.
d. United Steel Deck, Inc.
e. Verco Manufacturing Co. '
f. Wheeling Corrugating Co.; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp.
2.2 ROOF DECK t
A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI
Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 29, and the '
following:
1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, Grade C, D, or E or from A653, Grade 33 or
higher, shop primed with gray or white baked-on, lead- and chromate-free rust-inhibitive '
primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664.
2. Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib.
3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches(38 mm).
4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 20 gage, 0.0358 inch.
5. Span Condition: Triple span or more.
6. Side Laps: Overlapped.
2.3 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK
A. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form deck panels '
to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in
SDI Publication No. 29, the minimum section properties indicated, and the following: '
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc
coating.
2. Profile Depth: 9/16 inch (14 mm).
3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 26 gage 0.0179 inch.
4. Span Condition: Single span or more. .
2.4 ACCESSORIES
STEEL DECK 0650 05310-2 f
'T
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
• B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically
driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel
screws, No. 10 (4.8 mm) minimum diameter.
D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
'i E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000
psi (230 MPa), not less than 20 gage 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of
same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
F. Steel Sheet Accessories: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless
otherwise indicated.
,I G. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of
same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication
No. 29 for overhang and slab depth.
H. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,
'I finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm) thick, with
factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter.
' J. Repair Paint: Lead- and chromate-free rust-inhibitive primer complying with performance
• requirements of FS TT-P-664.
� PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
' A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
' 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in
SDI Publication No. 29, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations.
C. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
' and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side-lap interlocks.
• E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
' STEEL DECK 0650 05310 - 3
1
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting '
through or adjacent to decking. •
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, '
continuity of decking, and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, ,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
3.3 ROOF DECK INSTALLATION '
A. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface
diameter indicated or are seam welds with an equal perimeter, but not less than 1 % inches (38 '
mm) long, and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal. '
2. Weld Spacing: As indicated on structural plans.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/4 of the span or three side-lap '
fasteners per span.
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling No. 10 (4.8 mm) diameter or larger carbon-steel '
screws.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1 '/z
inches(38 mm), with end joints as follows: '
1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches(51 mm) minimum. •
D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof decking and weld '
flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 6 inches (305 mm) apart with at least 1 weld
at each corner.
E. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover plates,
end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck insulation.
F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated.
Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete
closure. '
3.4 FLOOR DECK INSTALLATION '
A. Fasten floor deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot(puddle) welds of the surface
diameter indicated and as follows: '
1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch.
2. Weld Spacing: Space weld 12 inches apart maximum.
3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location as required. '
B. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 •
inches (38 mm). ,
STEEL DECK 0650 05310 -4
II 1. End Joints: Lapped or butted at contractor's option.
• C. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting
1� structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Floor Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck,
according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and
1� sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck panels, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
' A. Testing: Contractor shall engage an Owner approved and qualified independent testing agency
' to perform field quality-control testing.
B. Allowance: Contractor shall include an allowance in their Base Bid to cover the direct costs of
the approved Testing and Inspection Agency. Any contractor overhead and profit shall be a
1� part of the base bid but not included as part of the allowance. No contractor overhead and profit
will be allowed to be included on the Testing and Inspection Agency direct costs. Refer to
Section 01210—Allowances.
I
C. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
E. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
1` F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.
II3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces
of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.
1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of
deck exposed to view.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1'
END OF SECTION 05310
1.
1�
1�
•
1
1 STEEL DECK 0650 05310-5
i
1
1
• SECTION 05400-COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
1 -
PART 1 -GENERAL
1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
' 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1
1. Exterior non-load-bearing curtain-wall framing.
2. Gypsum sheathing and air-infiltration barriers.
B. Related Sections include the following:
' 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for masonry shelf angles and connections.
2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for subflooring, wall sheathing, or roof sheathing
using wood-based structural-use panels, particleboard, fibrous-felted board, and foam-
yplastic sheathing.
• 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing metal-stud
framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
r 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing,
metal-stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies.
' 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Minimum uncoated thickness of cold-formed framing
delivered to the Project site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness used in the cold-
formed framing design. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at bends due to cold forming.
B. Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold-formed members.
1
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
' A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design
loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections
greater than the following:
' a. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall
height and 1.5".
• b. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall
height.
r
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 0650 05400 - 1
C. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing urtain-Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of ,
9 9 •
the wall height.
2. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or
overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and
anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature '
change of 120 deg F.
3. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction
tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as ,
follows:
a. Upward and downward movement of 3/4 inch.
B. Design exterior non-load-bearing curtain-wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection ,
without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.
C. Engineering Responsibilities: Engage a supplier who utilizes a qualified Professional Engineer
to prepare calculations, shop drawings, and other structural data for structural steel
connections. Refer to structural drawings for additional requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. ,
B. Shop Drawings: wall elevations showing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of
cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including '
mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing,
strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to
adjoining Work. '
C. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent
testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. '
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the following ,
complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products:
1. Expansion anchors. '
2. Power-actuated anchors.
3. Mechanical fasteners.
4. Vertical deflection clips. '
5. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
•
r
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 0650 05400-2 '
1�
1, 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
• A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
II B. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent
testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including uncoated steel
thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and
I) galvanized-coating thickness.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
1 jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548.
D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-
Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel."
E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire-resistance-rated
assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600, "Fire Resistance
' Design Manual," or by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from
the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
' F. AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
� . Structural Members" or "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members" and the following for calculating structural characteristics of cold-
formed metal framing:
1. CCFSS Technical Bulletin: "AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during
delivery, storage, and handling.
B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid
condensation.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
'J
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by
• one of the following:
r
i
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 0650 05400- 3
1
1. Allied American Studco Inc. '
2. Angeles Metal Systems. •
3. California Expanded Metal Products Co.
4. California Metal Systems, Inc.
5. Clark Steel Framing Industries.
6. Consolidated Fabricators Corp. r
7. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
8. Dale Industries, Inc.
9. Design Shapes in Steel.
10. Dietrich Industries, Inc. r
11. Knorr Steel Framing Systems.
12. MarinoWare; Div. of Ware Industries, Inc.
13. Scafco Corp. ,
14. Steel Construction Systems.
15. Steel Developers, LLC.
16. Steeler, Inc.
17. Studco of Hawaii, Inc. '
18. Super Stud Building Products, Inc.
19. Unimast, Inc.
20. United Metal Products, Inc. '
21. Western Metal Lath.
2.2 MATERIALS ,
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as
follows: '
1. Grade: 33 (230)for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch and less; 50 (340), •
Class 1 or 2 for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch and greater. r
2. Coating: G60 (Z180) for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch and less; G90
for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch and greater.
2.3 NON-LOAD-BEARING CURTAIN-WALL FRAMING '
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, '
with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:
1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0428 inch (18 gauge).
2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. '
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: '
1. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Matching steel studs.
2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.
C. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, '
with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement,
with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads, and as follows:. '
1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0428 inch. •
2. Flange Width: 2 inches.
r
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 0650 05400-4 '
1�
'I D. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting
of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.
•
1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges
designed to support horizontal and lateral loads, and as follows:
a. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0428 inch.
b. Flange Width: 2 inches.
2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:
i
a. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0428 inch.
' b. Flange Width: 3-1/2 inches.
E. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass clips, capable of accommodating
upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure.
2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
' A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members,
with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa).
B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise
indicated, as follows:
' 1. Supplementary framing.
2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
3. Web stiffeners.
4. End clips.
' 5. Foundation clips.
6. Gusset plates.
7. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts.
' 8.- Joist hangers and end closures.
9. Hole reinforcing plates.
10. Backer plates.
2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
1 A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123.
B. Expansion. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10
times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified
I independent testing agency.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.
• 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
ICOLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 0650 05400 - 5
E. Welding lectrodes: Comply with AWS standards. ,
9 PY
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ,
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. '
B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and '
plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency
and 30-minute working time.
C. Thermal Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced mineral-fiber blankets produced by ,
combining glass or slag fibers with thermosetting resins.
2.7 GYPSUM SHEATHING '
A. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing Board with Water-Resistant Core: ASTM C 79, with water-
resistant material incorporated into core and with water-repellent paper bonded to core's face, ,
back, and long edges.
1. Type and Thickness: Type X. See plans for thickness. ,
2. Edge and End Configuration: Square.
3. Size: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, '
the following: •
a. Georgia-Pacific Corp. '
b. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division.
C. USG Corp.; United States Gypsum Co.
2.8 SHEATHING ACCESSORIES
A. Air-Infiltration Barrier: Proprietary building wrap with flame-spread and smoke-developed ,
ratings of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Provide
one of the following products:
1. Polyethylene sheet; 0.0038 to 0.0064 inch thick; formed by spinning continuous strands '
of fine, high-density-polyethylene interconnected fibers and bonding them together by
heat and pressure; incorporating an additive to provide ultraviolet light resistance for up
to 120 days; and with a water-vapor transmission rate equaling 535 g through 1 sq. m of ,
surface in 24 hours according to ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Method A).
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Tyvek Housewrap" by
DuPont Company. ,
2. Polypropylene sheet; 0.0115 inch thick; consisting of spun-bonded polypropylene
substrate with a polypropylene coating attached directly to one side; and with a water-
vapor transmission rate equaling 125 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours according
to ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Method A).
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 0650 05400 -6 ,
T
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Typar HouseWrap" by
• Reemay, Inc.
B. Fasteners: Steel drill screws, ASTM C 954, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer
for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-
protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than. 800 hours according to
ASTM B 117.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing.and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and
requirements in this Section.
1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
' 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard
with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
' a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw
' penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.
4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw
' fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
• B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection
stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
i1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from
plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
' sheathing or other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-
square tolerance of 1/8 inch.
' PART 3- EXECUTION
' 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation
only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
' 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
' assembled.
' COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 0650 05400-7
B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent •
requirements are indicated. '
C. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and
requirements in this Section. '
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard '
with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. '
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw
penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.
D. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track '
or tension members.
E. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in ,
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured. '
F. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.
Independently frame both sides of joints.
G. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and
multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
H. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard ,
punched openings.
I. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan ,
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
3.3 NON-LOAD-BEARING CURTAIN-WALL INSTALLATION ,
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to '
supporting structure as indicated.
B. Fasten both flanges of studs to [top and] bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs
as follows:
1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches maximum.
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or ,
warped surfaces and similar requirements.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 0650 05400 -8 ,
,II D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical
• 9 9 9 P
loads while providing lateral support.
`II1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.
2. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to primary building
structure.
J E. Install horizontal bridging in curtain-wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but
not more than 54 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
�l 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12
inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of
width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness
matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs
orflanges.
1! a. Install solid blocking at every other stud.
2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated
and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to
stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
' F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip
angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable
curtain-wall-framing system.
3.4 CEILING/SOFFIT JOIST INSTALLATION
•
A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to
II supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.
. I
B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position,
' brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.
1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches.
2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers,
steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.
C. Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and as follows:
1. Joist Spacing: As indicated.
1 D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or
another combination of connected joists if indicated.
E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located
directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as
indicated on Shop Drawings.
1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.
' F. Install bridging of 'ois
• g gat eac h end joists and at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten
bridging at each joist intersection as follows:
_J
', COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 0650 05400- 9
I. Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist •
webs. '
2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated
and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to
bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.
G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. '
H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip
angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete
and stable joist-framing assembly.
3.5 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION ,
A. General: Install gypsum sheathing to comply with GA-253 and manufacturer's written '
instructions.
B. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of the work; fit tightly against abutting
construction, except provide a 3/8-inch setback where non-load-bearing construction abuts '
structural elements.
C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant installation so these materials ,
are installed in the sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through
completed exterior wall assembly.
D. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into '
facing. •
E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match spacing '
of structural support elements.
F. Horizontal Installation: Install 24-inch- wide gypsum sheathing boards horizontally with V-
grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in ,
contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of stud
flanges and stagger end joints of adjacent boards, not less than one stud spacing. Screw-
attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud at approximately 8 inches '
o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.
G. Vertical Installation: Install 48-inch-wide gypsum sheathing boards vertically with vertical edges
centered over flanges of steel studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent
boards. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud at
approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of
boards. ,
H. Air-Infiltration Barrier Application: Cover sheathing with air-infiltration barrier as follows:
1. Cut back air-infiltration barrier 1/2 inch on each side of break in supporting members at
expansion-or control joint locations.
2. Apply proprietary building wrap to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions. '
3. Apply air-infiltration barrier to cover vertical flashing with 4-inch overlap.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 0650 05400 - 10 '
1
i
i �
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
•
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-
control testing.
B. Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.
3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Protect paper-surfaced gypsum sheathing that will be exposed to weather for more than 30
days by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with a securely fastened air-infiltration
barrier. Apply.covering immediately after sheathing is installed.
C. Protect cutouts, corners, and joints in sheathing by filling with a flexible sealant or by applying
' tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer at time sheathing is applied.
• D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
1 Installer that ensure cold-formed metal framing is without damage or.deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
' END OF SECTION 05400
•
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 0650 05400 - 11
'I
SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS
11
I
i
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section"Structural Steel"for structural-steel framing system components.
' 1.3 SUBMITTALS
• A. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include
plans, elevations, sections, and details.of metal fabrications and their connections. Show
i anchorage and accessory items.
B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
i
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
,i A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Steel."
2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction,
verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying
' the Work.
' METAL FABRICATIONS 0650 05500- 1
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying •
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without '
field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
PART 2- PRODUCTS i
2.1 METALS, GENERAL ,
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with '
exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
2.2 FERROUS METALS 1
A. Structural Steel Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A572, Grade 50.
B. Structural Steel Angles, Channel, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. ,
C. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed hollow structural shapes ASTM A 500. '
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or
required by structural loads. '
E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with flange edges returned toward web •
and with 9/16-inch-(14.3-mm-)wide slotted holes in webs at 2 inches (51 mm) o.c.
1. Width of Channels: 1-5/8 inches(41 mm). ,
2. Depth of Channels: 1-5/8 inches(41 mm).
3. Metal and Thickness: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural
quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275)coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness.
4. Finish: Unfinished.
2.3 PAINT '
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd '
primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance
to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability
to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated '
fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior
walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. t
METAL FABRICATIONS 0650 05500-2 ,
j
• D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).
' E. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).
i F. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
H. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed.
!� 2.5 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
• splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
i C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
' 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
'I E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
• and similar items.
'I METAL FABRICATIONS 0650 05500- 3
1
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep •
holes where water may accumulate. '
H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation '
on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), '
material surfaces.
I. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges. '
J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners '
where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head
(countersunk)screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. '
2.7 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete '
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates after fabrication. '
•
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS '
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless '
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to
receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to
receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. '
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors 1-1/4 inches wide by % inch thick by 8 inches long ,
at 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. '
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM '
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of
profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and
use concealed field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation •
with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry '
METAL FABRICATIONS 0650 05500-4
It
;1
• construction, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from each end, 6 inches (150 mm) from
corners, and 24 inches(600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
I'. C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in the following locations:
1. Exterior.
I
' 2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
' 2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed
' below:
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and
' environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
• 1. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
' C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized
finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1, for shop
' painting.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
' A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete
and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
' and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
' not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
' METAL FABRICATIONS 0650 05500 -5
1
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after •
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. '
E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion '
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately. '
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
1
3.2 SETTING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members t
have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but,
if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. '
3.3 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS '
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, •
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if '
any.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING '
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop '
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. '
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
•
METAL FABRICATIONS 0650 05500 -6 '
Il
►1)
• SECTION 06100- ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
,l A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
II Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
') 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood blocking, nailers and miscellaneous framing.
2. Plywood panels.
B. Related Sections include the following:
9
1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for nonstructural carpentry items
exposed to view and not specified in another Section.
'J 1.3 DEFINITIONS
' A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
C. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5
} inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.
D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association.
2. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
' 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
•
tROUGH CARPENTRY 0650 06100- 1
DELIVERY, O IN '
1.5 DEL Y, ST RAGE, AND HANDLING .
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air '
circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS '
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL ,
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency ,
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. '
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber. ,
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER '
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in
contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated
according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). ,
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. •
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use '
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board '
of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: '
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. '
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other '
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking. '
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. •
4. Grounds. ,
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19
percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:
ROUGH CARPENTRY 0650 06100 -2 ,
i
1)
• 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
2. Spruce-pine-fir(south); NeLMA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any
lof the following species and grades:
') 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 3 grade; SPIB.
2. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Standard or 3 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA,
Il WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
' of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
II eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
l F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
IIcapable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
Ill * 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative, humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A.153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
Il E. Lag Bolts: ASME 1318.2.1 (ASME B1 8.2.3.8m).
11 F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563M)hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
'I G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
P Y
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
'J 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
I • A. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-
I propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active
ingredient.
'� ROUGH CARPENTRY 0650 06100 -3
PART 3- EXECUTION '
•
3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL '
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and ,
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with '
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or '
optimum joint arrangement.
C. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated '
lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. '
D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. '
E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully ,
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. •
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not
countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. '
3.2 WOOD GROUND, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to '
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved. ,
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 06100
1
•
ROUGH CARPENTRY 0650 06100 -4 ,
1
SECTION 06160-SHEATHING
1'
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
II1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wall sheathing.
2. Building wrap.
' 3. Sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment.
4. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing.
' B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Cold Formed Metal Framing" for metal stud construction associated
with materials listed.
' 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for plywood backing panels.
•
t1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
' 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
4. For building wrap, include data on air-/moisture-infiltration protection based on testing
according to referenced standards.
r1 B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project:
1. Preservative-treated plywood.
2. Building wrap.
r
tSHEATHING 0650 06160- 1
1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide '
materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART2- PRODUCTS ,
2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL '
A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness '
indicated.
C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. ,
•
2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD '
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. '
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to ,
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat all plywood, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 WALL SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior sheathing. ,
1. Span Rating: Not less than 16/0.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. '
B. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 79/C 79M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M,
gypsum sheathing; with water-resistant-treated core and with water-repellent paper bonded to ,
core's face, back, and long edges.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers •
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
SHEATHING 0650 06160 - 2 ,
T
h
h
• a. American Gypsum.
b. G-P Gypsum Corporation.
'}
C. National Gypsum Company.
1 d. United States Gypsum Co.
1� 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick.
3. Edge and End Configuration: Square.
4. Size: 48 by 96 inches for vertical installation.
IJ 2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
Ij in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. For wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless steel.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in
length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be
attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray
ll resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
'1 1. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with
• ASTM C 954.
2.5 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER
A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed
J indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV
stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company(The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap.
b. DuPont(E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek CommercialWrap.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 200 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per
!, ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure B).
3. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months.
1� B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
IJ 2.6 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS
• A. Sealant for Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing Board: Elastomeric, medium-modulus, neutral-
curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and
'� SHEATHING 0650 06160 - 3
other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated, and •
complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS '
A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,
rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to ,
produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings &Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Plus
Self-Adhered Flashing.
C. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300.
B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for '
substrate.
PART 3- EXECUTION '
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL '
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to •
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. '
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. '
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's"International Building Code."
D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these
materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing
through completed assembly.
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of 1
structural support elements.
G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so
sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is
forecast.
SHEATHING 0650 06160-4 ,
' 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
• A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood
'i PY Pp� 9
Construction Guide,"for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
' 1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
9
a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.
'I 3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
I
A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural
elements.
3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might
retain moisture, to prevent wicking.
B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into
facing.
' C. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of
• each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board
to each stud.
' 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from
edges and ends of boards.
3.4 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION
' A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion-
or control-joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise
indicated.
' B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Seal seams, edges,fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
3.5 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT
A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.
•
' SHEATHING 0650 06160 - 5
1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient quantity •
of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other 1
penetrations and openings.
3.6 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION 1
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions.
1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. '
2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
3. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings.
4. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings.
5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure
that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. 1
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface of 1
sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing. Apply covering
immediately after sheathing is installed. 1
END OF SECTION 06160
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
•
1
SHEATHING 0650 06160 - 6 '
• SECTION 06402-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
I! ,
' PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes the following:
1. Plastic-laminate window sills.
1 B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
' 1.3 DEFINITIONS
' A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories
and finishing materials and processes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
' details, attachment devices, and other components.
C. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Plastic laminates.
D. Samples for Verification:
' 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1
sample applied to core material.
•
' INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0650 06402 - 1
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE t
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products '
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-
service performance. '
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. '
C. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of
interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other '
requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ,
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation '
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions"Article.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative •
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify '
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work. '
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. '
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. '
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related '
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
•
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0650 06402 - 2 ,
1
I
'I
• PART 2- PRODUCTS
,l
2.1 MATERIALS
,) A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
'1 B. Wood Products: Comply with the following:
`` 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products(Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1
1� C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure
IIdecorative laminates by one of the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
,! b. Panolam Industries International Incorporated.
l c. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
'j 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
II • A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face
'( of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or
lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
'{ C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented Contact cement.
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
1
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior
woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
�lC. Complete fabrication, including assembly, and hardware application, to maximum extent
J possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
'I
t� INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0650 06402 - 3
2.4 PLASTIC-LAMINATE SILLS •
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with '
the following requirements:
1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGL.
2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. '
3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
4. Edges: Grade VGS, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following ,
categories:
a. Solid colors, gloss or matte finish. '
b. Patterns, gloss or matte finish.
PART 3- EXECUTION '
3.1 PREPARATION '
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation •
areas. ,
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for '
fabrication of tYP a of woodwork involved.
B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for '
fabrication in Part 2,to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. '
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400
mm).
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and •
matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0650 06402 -4
I
i
� I
• 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
,l END OF SECTION 06402
i •
1�
1
•
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0650 06402 - 5
I
SECTION 07210- BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
,I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
J Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concealed building insulation.
2. Vapor retarders.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Membrane Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing
construction.
2. Division 15 Section"Mechanical Insulation."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass
fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths)or rolls.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification:. Full-size units for each type of exposed insulation indicated.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency for insulation products.
1 D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.
' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-
' response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
_ . jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
BUILDING INSULATION 0650 07210- 1
1. Surface-Burning T '
g AS M E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. '
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ,
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written '
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and '
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project '
site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ,
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. '
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Fiber Glass.
5. Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane ,
facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25
and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. ,
C. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective
membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less);
Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim- ,
polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.
D. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets •
in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: '
BUILDING INSULATION 0650 07210 -2 ,
{4
'I
1. 3-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
• 2. 5-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
3. 9-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 30 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of
0.13 perm.
I 'J B. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws;with fender washers.
,I 2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation
manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.
I
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of
• Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting
performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
,J 3.2 PREPARATION
1� A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
,I B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice, rain, and snow.
III
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate
location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping.
'' BUILDING INSULATION 0650 07210 -3
E. For reformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from ,
P 9 P PP •
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units
to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make '
up total thickness.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION ,
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use ,
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to ,
edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed
installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm-in-winter side of construction, unless ,
otherwise indicated.
1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to '
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
D. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into all miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces '
where shown and required to form a continuous thermal insulation barrier to the exterior
building exposure. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume
equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu.ft.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. ,
Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder
to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber
insulation. '
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs.
Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall '
openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
C. Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including
runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping
joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's
written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing
members or other solid substrates. '
D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners
as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor '
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarder. '
F. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. •
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
BUILDING INSULATION 0650 07210-4
}
3.6 PROTECTION
IJ • A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation
is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
' immediately after installation.
, I
} END OF SECTION 07210
l
II
11
li
It
•
1�
11
1�
1'
1'
1�
IJ
li
�� BUILDING INSULATION 0650 07210 - 5
l
• SECTION 07531 - EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
II 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fully-Adhered membrane roofing system.
2. Roof Substrate Board.
' B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood nailers,curbs,and blocking.
2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings,
flashings, and counterflashings.
' 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's 'The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual"for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
B. Factored Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in
' SPRI's "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing
Systems,"after multiplication by a safety factor.
' 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not
' permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement,
and exposure to weather without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing-materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
' C. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply
with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system and that.
are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide"for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable.
Identify materials with FMG markings.
1. Roof system shall comply with the following:
• a. FM 1-49 Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Perimeter Flashing.
b. FM 1-28 Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Wind Loads to Roof Systems and Roof
Deck Securement.
EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 0650 07531 - 1
C. FM 1-29 Loss revention Data Sheet Above Deck Roof Components.
'
P P •d. NRCA Manual for Low-Slope Roofing Construction Details(Current Edition).
e. SMACNA Manual (Current Edition). '
f. ASCE 7, Chapter 6.
2. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A- 105.
3. Hail Resistance: MH. ,
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. '
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and '
attachments to other Work.
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. '
3. Saddles, Crickets, Tapered edge strips.
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is '
approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system '
complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"Article.
1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. ,
•
F. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. '
G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
H. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed
roofing installation.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive ,
manufacturer's warranty.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has FMG approval for membrane '
roofing system identical to that used for this Project.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system approved by roofing
membrane manufacturer. ,
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method ,
below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and •
inspecting agency.
EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 0650 07531 -2
,J
') 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes
• indicated.
1.7 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions
for storing and mixing with other components.
,I B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid material from direct sunlight.
i
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing,and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.
1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing accessories, roof
insulation, fasteners, substrate board, walkway products and other components of
membrane roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this
Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of
membrane roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners,
cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the
' following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
1
r
EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 0650 07531 - 3
PART 2 -PRODUCTS I
•
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection: '
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers '
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified. .
2.2 EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE '
A. EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced uniform, flexible sheet made '
from EPDM, and as follows:
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. ,
b. Firestone Building Products Company.
C. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc. '
d. Versico Inc.
e. Approved Equal
2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. '
3. Exposed Face Color: Black. •
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS '
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with membrane roofing. ,
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. 1
C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive.
D. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- wide
minimum, butyl splice tape with release film.
E. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant, color to match roofing
membrane
F. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant. ,
G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard preddiled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick;with anchors. ,
H. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, •
approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.
EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 0650 07531 -4
!' I. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-
resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and
acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
' J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide p ourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
lashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet lashings,T joint covers, in-seam sealants,
�I termination reglets,cover strips, and other accessories.
2.4 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4
inch thick.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Deck Prime"
manufactured by Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
' B. Adhesive: Manufacturer's low-rise foam adhesive appropriate for attaching substrate board to
light-weight insulating concrete deck.
1 2.5 ROOF INSULATION
' A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and
referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses
indicated.
' B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both
• major surfaces.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. AlliedSignal Inc.; Commercial Roofing Systems.
' b. Apache Products Company.
C. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
d. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
e. Celotex Corporation.
' f. Firestone Building Products Company.
g. GAF Materials Corp.
h. GenFlex Roofing Systems.
' i. Hunter Panels, LLC.
j. Johns Manville International, Inc.
k. Koppers Industries.
1. RMAX.
_..
M. Approved Equal.
C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
' indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for
• intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.
EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 0650 07531 - 5
B. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to •
adhere roof insulation to substrate. '
C. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch
thick.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provided "Dens-Deck" manufactured
by Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION '
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the ,
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof
drains are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. '
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections. '
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking '
place or when rain is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is ,
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.3 SUBSTRATE BOARD ,
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes
with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. ,
1. Apply substrate board in manufacturer's recommended spray-on adhesive per the
manufacturer's written instructions. '
3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to '
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. •
EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 0650 07531 - 6
' 1 B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof
insulation.
! C. Adhered saddles and Crickets: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as
follows:
' 1. Set in a cold fluid-applied adhesive.
' 3.5 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before
! installing.
B. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
! dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing membrane at
rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing membrane. Do
not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane.
D. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and
' perimeter of roofing.
E. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
' F. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and
firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed
edges of roofing membrane terminations.
G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements.
! H. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing
membrane in place with clamping ring.
! 3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according
to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding.adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping
' sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of
sheet flashing terminations.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
! termination bars.
! EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 0650 07531 -7
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ,
A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
P 9 9 Y ! I
roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. !
B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. '
C. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
1
3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction 1
period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner. 1
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition 1
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty
requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures 1
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
1
i
1
1
•
1
1
EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 0650 07531 -8 ,
T
1'
• 3.9 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the Roofing Installer, has
' performed roofing and associated work("work")on the following project:
1. Owner: <Insert name of Owner.>
2. Address: <Insert address.>
' 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information.>
i 4. Address: <Insert address.>
5. Area of Work: <Insert information.>
6. Acceptance Date: <Insert date.>
' 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time.>
II 8. Expiration Date: <Insert date.>
' B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a
subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and
workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
1 C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein
set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be
made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and
' defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.
D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
' 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the
•, building, and to building contents, caused by:
a. lightning;
b. peak gust wind speed exceeding 80 mph;
C. fire;
' d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive
deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment
' supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;
f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance
personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by
' Owner.
2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and
void until such damage.has-been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense
' thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not
liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or
' faults or defects of work.
4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing
Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations,
attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become
' null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work
covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations,
• Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said
' work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said
' EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 0650 07531 -9
alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a
•limitation or termination of this Warranty.
5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but
was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded
basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall
become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects
work covered by this Warranty.
6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks,
defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to
inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. '
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and
shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully
available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not ,
operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work
according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract
was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of
<Insert month>, <Insert year>.
1. Authorized Signature: <Insert signature.> 1
2. Name: <Insert name.>
3. Title: <Insert title.>
END OF SECTION 07531
•
I
I
•
EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 0650 07531 - 10 '
r
�I
,I
• SECTION 07620-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
'1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
'j 1.2 SUMMARY
11 A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim:
'l 1. Pre-finished flashing and counterflashing.
2. Pre-finished roof edge drainage systems.
�) 3. Manufactured pre-finished copings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
2. Division 7 Section "EPDM Membrane Roofing" and "Modified Bitumen" for installing
sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing membrane.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sheet metal flashing and trim
'j sealants.
•
,i 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
i
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and
fastener disengagement.
B. FMG Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings that are listed in FMG's
11 "Approval Guide"and approved for Windstorm Classification, Class 1-90.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
�! preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist
rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base
'j engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to
building interior.
•
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 0650 07620 - 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS •
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material '
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations. ,
Distinguish between shop-and field-assembled work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim indicated with '
factory-applied color finishes.
D. Warranty: Special Warranty specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal '
Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal '
flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.
B. Unload store and install sheet metal flashing aterials and fabrications in a manner to prevent
9 P �
bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
•
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated '
covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials
that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
1.7 COORDINATION '
A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining '
construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
I
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS '
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers '
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 0650 07620- 2
t
ll
11 2.2 SHEET METALS
• A. Pre-painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable
for forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows:
1. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with
inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion
coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
11 instructions.
a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured
system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color
'i topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight;
complying with AAMA 2605.
1) Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
1!
B. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process
and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
i
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; structural quality.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating
designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural
quality.
3. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating:
• a. High Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
1) Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat,
thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and
,I fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent
polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties
and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2605, except as modified
below:
a) Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours.
b) Salt-Spray Resistance: 2000 hours.
2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
' 2.3 CONCEALED METALS
1 A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by
manufacturer for use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.
B. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation;
1 structural quality.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 0650 07620 -3
2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil-thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. •
B. Felts: ASTM D 226,Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ,
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal
flashing and trim installation.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and design for pre-
fabricated copings.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with '
hex washer head.
4. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
5. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal
gutter width.
C. Solder for Zinc: ASTM B 32, 60 percent lead and 40 percent tin with low antimony, as •
recommended by manufacturer. '
D. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane or silicone polymer sealant; of
type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim
and remain watertight. '
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,
polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. '
H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. '
I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
•
I
1
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 0650 07620-4
'T
'I
II2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
11 SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field
measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
I
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
i
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
'I C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-
' lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,form seams, and solder.
D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot
be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled
with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
I
F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal
flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Fabricate cleats-and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
• from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual' for
application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.7 ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
l
1. Pre-painted Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick.
' 2. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0217 inch thick.
B. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following material:
' 1. Pre-painted Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick.
C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material:
' 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick.
2. Pre-painted, Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0217 inch thick.
' D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material:
• 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 0650 07620 - 5
2.8 COPINGS '
A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths •
P 9 '
not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage, concealed splice plates with same finish as
coping caps, mitered corner units, and end cap units.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: MM Systems Corporation, SLC Systems or a comparable '
product by one of the following:
2. Available Manufacturers: '
a. Architectural Products Co.
b. Hickman,W. P. Company.
C. MM Systems Corporation. ,
3. Coping Caps: Snap-on,fabricated from the following exposed metal:
a. Pre-painted Aluminum: 0.063 inch thick. ,
4. Coping Cap Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
5. Corners: Continuously welded. '
6. Snap-on Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized steel sheet, 12 inches wide,
0.028 inch thick, with integral cleats.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS '
A. Concealed Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: ,
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch thick, minimum. •
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.0276 inch thick, minimum.
3. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0276 inch thick, minimum.
2.10 FINISHES '
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes. '
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are '
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are ,
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION 1
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 0650 07620- 6 '
'! 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
• anchored.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
�i A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
I
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
' 1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
1. Coat side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating
' where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a
course of polyethylene underlayment.
' 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof
performance.
C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
' marks.
• D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat
' seams with minimum exposure of solder,welds, and elastomeric sealant.
E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend
tabs over fasteners.
F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or
' intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not
be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.
G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for
nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
2. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners.
H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction.
' 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less
• than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient
temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 0650 07620 -7
21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting '
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type •
joints at temperatures below 40 deg F(4 deg C). '
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION '
A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements
sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as
indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. ,
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces for specified wind zone.
C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces for specified wind zone. '
D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top
edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install ,
stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. '
Insert counterflashing .in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches
and bed with elastomeric sealant.
1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead '
wedges and sealant or interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant. •
3.4 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION ,
A. Flashing: Coordinate installation of flashing with installation of roofing and other facia and wall '
systems.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ,
I
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering. ,
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim '
are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused
fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition
during construction.
D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. '
END OF SECTION 07620 •
r
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 0650 07620 - 8 '
,T
11
SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1 A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section:
II B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry, cast stone and/or limestone (Type B
or D).
b. Joints between different materials listed above.
C. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows
' (Type B or D).
d. Other joints as indicated or required. (Type approved by Architect)
2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls to be
painted (Type F).
' b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings to be painted (Type F).
•
C. Tile control and expansion joints (Type A, E or as recommended for location).
d. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete
walls and partitions (Type F).
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows, and elevator entrances, as required and approved by Architect(Type F).
f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters (Type
1 g. Other joints as indicated or required (Type approved by Architect).
' 3. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs (Type C or E).
b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring(Type A, C or E).
' C. Other joints as indicated or required (Type approved by Architect).
4. Verify type joint materials and color to be used at all locations with Architect.
' C. Related Sections include the following:
1 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and
gaskets.
2. Division 8 Section "Glazing"for glazing sealants.
1 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum
board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
• 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
JOINT SEALANTS 0650 07920 - 1
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous •
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. ,
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. '
C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer.who has specialized in installing joint sealants
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS '
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following '
conditions: •
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are ,
less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants ,
capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.6 WARRANTY ,
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in ,
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace '
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified
in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. '
C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint •
sealants from the following: '
JOINT SEALANTS 0650 07920 -2 ,
1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
• manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by
structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals,tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the sealant
schedules at the end of Part 3.
II
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for
' this characteristic.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomenc Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the
' end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and
uses.
B. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will
come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description
indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of.Part 3.
2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
' indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
— B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to
control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
' JOINT SEALANTS 0650 07920- 3
1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. '
2. Type O: Open-cell material. .
3. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin. '
4. Type: Any material indicated above.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant '
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-
adhesive tape where applicable.
i
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of '
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants '
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to '
promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints. '
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION '
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of '
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint '
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles ,
remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:
a. Concrete. '
b. Masonry.
C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. ,
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
C. Porcelain enamel.
JOINT SEALANTS 0650 07920-4 '
,l d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
' • B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant
) manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas
of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
'1 C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture,or tear sealant backings.
• 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
11 D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
' sealants and back of joints.
E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
'i 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
a 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
1 F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
-- curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
1 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
• methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
' JOINT SEALANTS 0650 07920 - 5
3.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE •
A. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant (Type A): Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, '
provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile
joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity
and temperature extremes, and that comply with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. ,
b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones.
C. NuFlex 302; NUCO Industries, Inc.
d. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation.
e. PSI-611; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
f. Tremsil 600 White;Tremco.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component)and NS(nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, '
O.
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Ceramic tile. '
B. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant (Type B): Where joint sealants of this type are
indicated, provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following: ,
•
a. Vulkem 922; Mameco International. ,
b. Dynatrol II; Pecora Corporation.
C. Flexiprene 2000; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
d. Sikaflex-2c NS; Sika Corporation.
e. DYmeric 511;Tremco. '
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent)and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25. '
4. Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent in
compression for a total of 100 percent movement.
5. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a high- ,
performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, limestone, and wood.
7. Applications: Exterior masonry control and expansion joints, window perimeters at
exterior,joints between different materials listed above, etc. ,
C. Multicomponent Pourable Urethane Sealant (Type C): Where joint sealants of this type are
indicated, provide products complying with the following: '
1. Products: Available products include the following: •
a. Chem-Calk 550; Bostik Inc.
JOINT SEALANTS 0650 07920 - 6 ,
'T
I' b. Vulkem 245; Mameco International.
•
C. Pourthane; W.R. Meadows, Inc.
') d. Elasto-Thane 920 Pourable; Pacific Polymers, Inc.
e. NR-200 Urexpan; Pecora Corporation.
f. NR-300 Urexpan, Type M; Pecora Corporation.
g. PSI-270SL; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
I h. PSI-551/RC-2; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
i. Sikaflex-2c SL; Sika Corporation.
1 j. SL 2; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent)and P (pourable).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: T(traffic)
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: O.
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Concrete.
,j 6. Applications: Interior concrete floor control/expansion joints.
D. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant (Type D): Where joint sealants of this type are
' indicated, provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Chem-Calk 900; Bostik Inc.
b. Chem-Calk 915; Bostik Inc.
C. Chem-Calk 945; Bostik Inc.
d. Vulkem 921; Mameco International.
• e. PR-255; Ohio Sealants, Inc.
f. Dynatrol I; Pecora Corporation.
' g. Flexiprene 1000; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
h. PSI-901; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
i. SM7100 Permathane; Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
j. DyMonic;Tremco.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component)and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
' 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
' a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, galvanized steel, brick, ceramic
tile, and wood.
E. Single-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant (Type E): Where joint sealants of this type are
indicated, provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Chem-Calk 950; Bostik Inc.
b. Vulkem 45; Mameco International.
'
C. Vulkem Nova 300 SSL; Mameco International.
d. NR-201; Pecora Corporation.
e. Flexiprene PSI-951; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
f. SL 1; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc..
' JOINT SEALANTS 0650 07920-7
1
2. Type and Grade: S (single component)and P (pourable). '
3. Class: 25. •
4. Use[s] Related to Exposure: T (traffic). r
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: O.
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Ceramic tile. ,
3.4 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Acrylic-Latex Sealant (Type F): Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products r
complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following: ,
a. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc. r
b. NuFlex 330; NUCO Industries, Inc.
C. LC 160 All Purpose Acrylic Caulk; Ohio Sealants, Inc.
d. AC-20; Pecora Corporation.
e. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc. r
f. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.
g. Tremflex 834;Tremco.
2. Applications: Interior areas as indicated or required. r
END OF SECTION 07920 r
•
r
r
r
r
r
r
•
r
r
JOINT SEALANTS 0650 07920-8
►1i
• SECTION 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hollow-metal steel frames.
' B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 painting Sections for field painting steel frames.
' 1.3 DEFINITIONS
' A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
•
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label
' compliance, fire-resistance and temperature-rise ratings, and finishes for each type of steel door
and frame specified.
B. Shop Drawings: In addition to requirements below, provide a schedule of steel doors and
' frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings:
1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles.
2. Details of each different wall opening condition.
3. Details of anchorages, accessories,joints, and connections.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain steel doors and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
' A. Deliver frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site
• storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
' STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0650 08110- 1
1
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded •
to jambs and mullions. '
C. Store frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads up,
spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or
canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber.
1. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-
inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. '
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate '
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying '
the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating standard steel
frames without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual
opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. '
1.8 COORDINATION '
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for steel frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to '
Project site in time for installation. •
PART 2- PRODUCTS '
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ,
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: '
1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.
2. Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
3. CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
4. Kewanee Corporation (The).
5. Mesker Door Inc.
6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, '
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. •
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0650 08110-2 ,
�T
C. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
' attaching standard steel door frames of type indicated.
.D. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50 respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
,l E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
�1
2.3 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to comply
with exterior frame requirements.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face corners and seamless face
joints.
1 2. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet.
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as frames to
'l comply with the following minimum sizes:
1. Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than hinge,
secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
2. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.
3. All Other Surface Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch thick. -
D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
E. Jamb Anchors:
1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch thick.
F. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as
follows:
' 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
G. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
H. Plaster Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016-inch thick.
2.4 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
• A. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with standard steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch high,
unless otherwise indicated.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0650 08110 - 3
2.5 FABRICATION •
A. General: Fabricate steel frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately ,
form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project
site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Steel Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations,
provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. '
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners,
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor. ,
4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: '
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches in height.
5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as '
follows. Provide plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. ,
C. Hardware Preparation: Facto ry prepare steel frames to receive tem lated mortised hardware; •
include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware
Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.
2. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series '
specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Locate hardware as
indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.
2.6 STEEL FINISHES '
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" '
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Finish steel door and frames after assembly. ,
B. Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning";
remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale '
and rust, if present, from uncoated steel; comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," or
SSPC SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after '
surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a
uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils. •
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0650 08110 -4 ,
i
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free rimer
• P 9. P
complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer
i' for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated;
and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
' requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of standard
steel doors and frames.
1. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of
I ' standard steel frame connections before frame installation.
2. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
' A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory.
tB. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace standard
1
steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
t from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
'J 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel
lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from
' head to floor.
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install steel frames
plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Steel Frames: Install steel frames for doors, sidelights, borrowed lights and other openings, of
size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI 105.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
• anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
' surfaces smooth and undamaged.
' STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0650 08110 - 5
a. Install door silencers in frames before routin . '
9 9 •
b. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured. '
C. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and '
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled '
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. '
4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 '
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall. '
C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. '
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final '
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including steel frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. '
B. Clean grout and other bonding material off steel frames immediately after installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of '
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
END OF SECTION 08110 '
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0650 08110-6 ,
1
i
,1
• SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
� 1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1 A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces, to match existing.
2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Related Sections include the following:
' 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames"for hollow metal frames.
i1.3 SUBMITTALS
• A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for
openings.
1 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
1 other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
1 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
5. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.
1 C. Samples for Review: Provide foursquare (10"- 12") samples showing wood veneer quality.
1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
' B. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."
1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
• A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
iB. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0650 08211 - 1
i
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. •
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS '
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet ,
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and
90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the
remainder of the construction period. '
1.7 WARRANTY i
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in
materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84- '
inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a
3-inch span.
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or '
replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion: i
a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2- PRODUCTS '
•
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ,
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering ,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Flush Wood Doors:
a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
b. Eggers Industries;Architectural Door Division.
C. GRAHAM Manufacturing Corp. '
d. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
e. VT Industries Inc.
f. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Doors for Transparent Finish: ,
1. Grade: Premium,with Grade AA faces.
2. Species and Cut: Red oak, plain sliced. '
3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. •
5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by '
mullions.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0650 08211 -2 ,
�11
• 6. Stiles: Same species as faces.
�i
2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS
A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2.
2. Provide doors with either glued-block or structural composite lumber cores instead of
particleboard cores at locations where exit devices are indicated.
B. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors:
1. Core: Particleboard unless Glued block or Structural composite lumber is required.
2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
2.4 FABRICATION
'I A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances
and bevels, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply
with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
'j B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
• with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,
DHI Al 15-W series standards, and hardware templates.
'J 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
2. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of
Jfire-rated doors.
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of
'I referenced standards for kind(s)of door(s) required.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
'l PART 3- EXECUTION
,l 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
' 2. Reject doors with defects.
• B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1�
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0650 08211 - 3
1
3.2 INSTALLATION •
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." ,
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. ,
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-fated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. '
D. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements:
1. Division 9 Section "Painting." '
3.3 ADJUSTING '
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. '
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing. ,
END OF SECTION 08211
•
•
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0650 08211 -4 '
'T
,) SECTION 08331 -OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
•
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
i J
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
' 1.2 SUMMARY
f
A. This Section includes the following types of [manually] [and] [electric-motor-]operated overhead
coiling doors:
1. Counter door(one required).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position to
the fully open position and returned to the closed position.
' 1.4 SUBMITTALS
• A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the
following:
B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's product data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
' B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
' PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to
' withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended
• by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:
1. Aluminum Door Curtain Slats: ASTM B 209 or ASTM B 221, alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 0650 08331 - 1
a. Aluminum Extrusion Thickness: Not less than 0.051 inch. ,
b. Flat profile slats.
B. Endlocks for Counter Doors: Manufacturer's standard locks on not less than alternate curtain •
slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement. ,
C. Bottom Bar for Counter Doors: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, ,
either stainless-steel or aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats.
1. Astragal: Provide a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible
vinyl, rubber, or neoprene; for placement between angles or fitted to shape, as a cushion '
bumper for interior door.
i
D. Curtain Jamb Guides for Counter Doors: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of extruded aluminum,
with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to
withstand loading. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact
and to minimize operational noise; with removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of
curtain. '
2.2 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES '
A. Hood: Form to act as weatherseal and entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism
at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top
and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and provide '
fascia for any portion of between jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide
intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.
1. Fabricate hoods for aluminum doors, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum 1
producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated; 0.032-inch minimum thickness,
complying with ASTM B 209.
2. Shape: Round or Square. '
3. Include automatic drop baffle to guard against passage of smoke.
B. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated, provide door matching lifting handles on each side '
of door.
C. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by
padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side. ,
2.3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM '
A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring
mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with '
barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating
members.
B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or '
seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up
curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. (2.5
mm/m) of span under full load. '
C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs.
Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from •
outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 0650 08331 -2 ,
' D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring
ends and carry torsional load.
• E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or
F' cold-rolled steel plate.
' 2.4 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
A. Push-up Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so required lift or pull for door
operation does not exceed 25 Ibf.
2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
• B. Manufacturer's standard mill finish.
C. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating
0.010 mm or thicker)complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,
jamb and head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports.
3.2 ADJUSTING
' A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or
distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
END OF SECTION 08331
•
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 0650 08331 - 3
. I
,I
• SECTION 08410-ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
Ii 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
lA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
'I i ..._, 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior aluminum-framed storefront window systems, to match existing.
2. Aluminum awning window units built into storefront framing systems, to match existing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation materials field installed with
aluminum-framed systems.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with
aluminum-framed systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.
3. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this
I � Section.
� 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding,
without failure, the effects of the following:
1. Structural loads.
�
� 2. Thermal movements.
R 3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly.distributed and concentrated live loads.
4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
5. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
C. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements, to glazing.
' d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
f. Sealant failure.
g. Failure of operating units to function properly.
B. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: 90 mi/h minimum wind velocity, but in no case less than the loads specified
and indicated on the structural drawings.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS 0650 08410 - 1
1
2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
C. Deflection of Framing Members: ,
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6
inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or '
an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to '/2 inch, whichever is
less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, '
whichever is smaller.
D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to
ASTM E 330 as follows: '
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. '
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds. '
E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. '
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain
and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), '
material surfaces.
F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed '
glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft.
G. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not '
evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load
design pressure, but not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. '
1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating systems or appearing on
systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. '
Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and cannot damage
adjacent materials or finishes is not considered water leakage.
H. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing '
areas having condensation-resistance factor(CRF)of not less than 53 when tested according to
AAMA 1503.
I. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and
framing areas having average U-factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested
according to AAMA 1503.
J. Aluminum Awning Window Performance Requirements: Testing shall demonstrate compliance '
with requirements indicated in AAMA 101 for air infiltration, water penetration, and structural
performance for type, grade, and performance class of window units required. Where required
design pressure exceeds the minimum for the specified window grade, comply with
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES '
AND STOREFRONTS 0650 08410 -2
,T
• requirements of AAMA 101, Section 3, "Optional Performance Classes," for higher than
minimum performance class.
1. Air-Infiltration Rate for Operating Units: Not more than 0.06 cfm/ft. of operable sash joint
for an inward test pressure of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft.
2. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward test
pressure of 15 percent of the design pressure.
3. Structural Performance: No failure or permanent deflection in excess of 0.4 percent of
any member's span after removing the imposed load, for a.positive (inward) and negative
(outward)test pressure of 30 Ibf/sq. ft..
4. Condensation Resistance:' Provide units tested for thermal performance according to
AAMA 1503.1 showing a condensation resistance factor(CRF)of 45.
'1 5. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Level 10 requirements when tested
)) according to ASTM F 588.
6. Thermal Movements: Provide window units that allow thermal movement resulting from
the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature when engineering,
fabricating, and installing aluminum windows to prevent buckling, opening of joints, and
overstressing of components, connections, and other detrimental effects. Base
engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to solar heat
' gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg.F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100
deg C), material surfaces.
1'
1A SUBMITTALS
• A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
J and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
D. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
i
`J E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSUR A NC E
' A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work of
this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
' 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum-framed systems including
Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard
units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and submission of reports of
tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies.
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
• systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS 0650 08410 - 3
are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction •
testing, field testing, and in-service performance. ,
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory ,
data to Architect for review.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-
-Aluminum."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ,
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed
systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings. '
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum-framed systems ,
without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
1.7 WARRANTY '
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to '
repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with •
requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: '
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. '
C. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does
not include normal weathering. '
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT MANUFACTURERS ,
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for some of aluminum-framed systems is based on a •
specific manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements and matching existing, provide
a product by one of the following:
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES '
AND STOREFRONTS 0650 08410-4
T
• 1. Kawneer.
2. Vistawall Architectural Products.
2.2 AWNING WINDOW UNIT MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Awning Windows:
' a. Acorn Window Systems.
1 b. Alenco Commercial Division.
C. EFCO Corporation.
d. Peerless Products, Inc.
e. Kawneer.
' f. Vistawall Architectural Products.
2.3 WINDOW UNIT MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength,
corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate
tensile strength and not less than 0.062 inch thick at any location for main frame and sash
members.
' B. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials
• warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window
members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of window units.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick,
reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads
' or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use
exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of
member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate.
' C. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of
aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel or iron complying with
' requirements of ASTM B 633; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
D. Compression-Type Glazing Strips and Weatherstripping: Unless otherwise indicated, and at
manufacturer's option, provide compressible stripping for glazing and weatherstripping such as
molded EPDM or-neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000 Designation 2BC415 to
3BC620, or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287, or molded expanded EPDM or
neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4.
' 1. Provide stripping with integral centerline barrier fin of semirigid plastic sheet of
- polypropylene.
' E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by
manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic,
• nonshrinking, and nonmigrating. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" of these
Specifications for selection and installation of sealants.
' ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS 0650 08410 - 5
2.4 ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT MATERIALS •
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. '
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/6 308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.1OM.
B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with
SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. ,
Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and
prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. '
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M.
2.5 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness '
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Thermally Broken Construction: Framing members are composite assemblies of two '
separate extruded-aluminum components permanently bonded by an elastomeric •
material of low thermal conductance or High-performance plastic connectors separate
framing members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. '
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. ,
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural ,
movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. '
D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing
compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to
match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible ,
deflection.
F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by
manufacturer for joint type.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES '
AND STOREFRONTS 0650 08410 -6
'T
1�
11
• 2.6 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
J B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or
hextruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.
J C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.
4�J 2.7 AWNING WINDOW UNITS
A. Window Grade and Class: Comply with requirements of AAMA Grade and Performance
Class AP-HC60(AP-AW60) and match existing units.
B. Hardware: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware:
1. Operating Device: Push-bar-type operator located on j
tYP jamb at sill.P
2. Lock: Combination lever handle and cam-action lock with concealed pawl.
2.8 WINDOW UNIT HARDWARE
i+ A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel,
or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum and of sufficient strength to
perform the function for which it is intended.
�lB. Four-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904.1.
•
1. Friction Shoes: Provide friction shoes of nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining,
noncorrosive, durable material.
2. Provide screw-type system, complete with shafts, brackets, levers, rods, oil-encased gear
1 boxes, and standard fittings and accessories for operation indicated.
�J
2.9 WINDOW UNIT ACCESSORIES
1� A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories that comply with indicated standards.
1 B. Weatherstripping: Provide sliding-type weatherstripping where sash rails slide horizontally or
vertically along unit frame. Provide compression-type weatherstripping at perimeter of each
operating sash where sliding type is inappropriate.
1 1. Provide-weatherstripping locked into extruded grooves in sash.
1
2.10 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Insulating Materials: As specified in Division 7 Section"Building Insulation."
B. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
1 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS 0650 08410 -7
2.11 STOREFRONT FABRICATION
A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of
finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or ,
grinding.
C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,
and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. ,
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest '
extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops). '
E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
2.12 WINDOW UNIT FABRICATION •
A. General: Fabricate aluminum window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a '
complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units.
1. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. '
2. Prepare window sash or ventilators for glazing, except where preglazing at the factory is
indicated.
B. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate window units with an integral, concealed, low- ,
conductance, thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and window members
exposed on interior, in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. ,
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than 3 years, has
been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation, and
has been tested to show adequate strength and security of glass retention. '
2. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to
exterior.
C. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory where possible and practical for
applications indicated. Comply with glass and glazing requirements of Division 8 Section
"Glazing"of these Specifications and AAMA 101.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES ,
AND STOREFRONTS 0650 08410 - 8
T
,I
• 2.13 ALUMINUM FINISHES
w'l A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
C. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,
integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with
AAMA 611.
1. Color: Medium Bronze(match existing).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
' 3.2 INSTALLATION
•
' A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1 2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
' deterioration.
6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive
---
spacers as recommended by manufacturer for'this-_purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
' C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section
-. "Joint Sealants"and to produce weathertight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp
or rack.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
AND STOREFRONTS 0650 08410-9
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." •
G. Install insulation materials as specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." '
H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce
weathertight installation. '
I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum
tolerances: '
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4
inch over total length.
2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. '
3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch.
END OF SECTION 08410 '
•
1
•
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES ,
AND STOREFRONTS 0650 08410 - 10
,T
• SECTION 08711 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
J A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Commercial door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
'I A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing
fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate
the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,
thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
11
• 1. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible
date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede
fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include
i Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and
other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final
` keying instructions for locks; which are to be keyed to Owner's existing system with Corbin
locksets. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door
designations.
D. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals
' specified in Division 1.
E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity
and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the
• course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and
keying.
' C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single
manufacturer.
1
DOOR HARDWARE 0650 08711 - 1
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: ,
1. General: Comply with regulatory requirements for all hardware, including making •
recommended modification to Architect to comply, if necessary. '
2. Comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act
ADA, as follows:
a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy '
to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or
twisting of the wrist. '
b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements
indicated:
1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to '
Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware '
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver keys directly to Owner. '
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and '
other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop •
Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing
door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. '
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other '
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents. '
B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace
components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: ,
1. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.
2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. '
C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE '
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS •
nnnR HARnWARR 0650 08711 -2
T -
I'I 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and
the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Verify that all hardware in the Door
Hardware Schedule complies with the minimum requirements of this Section; if not, adjust
accordingly and obtain Architects approval.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products
equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the
end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum
' requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS
') A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
Jproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
11 1. Hinges:
1 a. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI).
b. Hager Companies (HAG).*
C. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB).
• d. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK).
e. Stanley Commercial_Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (SCH).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1.
,I 2. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.
11 C. Quantity: Provide three hinges for all doors, unless otherwise indicated:
D. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely(both leaves) into
wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
' E. Hinge Base Metal: Provide not less than the following:
1. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin as a minimum, unless noted otherwise.
' F. Hinge Options: Comply with the following minimums and as indicated in the Door Hardware
Schedule:
1. Corners: Square.
G. Fasteners: Comply with the following:
' 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.
2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.
3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.
' 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal
doors, wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface
of hinges.
DOOR HARDWARE 0650 08711 - 3
2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: '
1. Mechanical Locks and Latches:
a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company '
(MED)*
B. Standards: Comply with the following: ,
1. Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
C. Bored Locks: BHMA Grade 1; Series 4000.
D. Lock Trim: Comply with the following: ,
1. Lever: Cast.
E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire '
door requirements, and as follows:
1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw. '
F. Backset: 2-3/4 inches.
2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING '
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products to match the '
existing system and as follows:
a. Cylinders: Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group ,
company(MED)*
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5.
C. Cylinder Grade: BHMA Grade 1. '
D. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless
steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:
1. Number of Pins: Six, to match existing.
2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight-or clover-type cam.
3. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised '
trim ring.
4. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
E. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the '
following:
1. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only
the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. '
nnnR HARn1A1ARF n8rin 08711 -4
w
1,
1
F. Keying System: Provide a keying system complying with the following requirements:
• 1. Existing System: Masterkey (Departments) and grandmaster (Building) key all locks
'l into Owner's existing keying system; with Corbin locksets.
ii G. Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following:
1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include
the following notation:
a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner.
2. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following:
a. ;Cylinder Change Keys: Three.
b. Master Keys: Five.
2.5 STRIKES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Strikes.for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5.
C. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set:
•
2.6 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH).
2. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(GJ).*
' 3. Hager Companies(HAG).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
' 1. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16.
2. Door Silencers: BHMA A156.16.
C. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Grade 1.
D. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2
inch; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's
name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in
• conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.
' 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
DOOR HARDWARE 0650 08711 -5
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method ,
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. •
Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and '
BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming
methods if different from specified standard.
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally '
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head
screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. '
1. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications:
a. Mortise hinges to doors. '
b. Strike plates to frames.
2. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, '
"Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors."
2.8 FINISHES
A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18.
S. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the
following: '
1. BHMA 612: Satin bronze , clear coated, over broze base metal.
PART 3-EXECUTION
•
3.1 EXAMINATION '
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION '
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series.
1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107. ,
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI Al 15-W series. '
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural '
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors." •
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
nr)r1R wAPn%A/ARF nsso nR711 -A
I'
l
I� painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
• protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-
F mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Il 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
3.4 ADJUSTING
X11
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to.
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
Ijoperate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
'' and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the
door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to
the leading edge of the door.
II 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
JIJI A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage
II or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
l • 3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,
and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.
3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
GROUP NO. 1
' Doors 101A, 102A
1 Lockset CL3451 x NZD x US10 CorbinRusswin
1 set Silencers
Reuse existing hardware for hinges, stops, etc.
GROUP NO. 2
Doors 103A, 104A, 107A, 108A, 109A, 110A
1 Lockset CL3451 x NZD x US10 CorbinRusswin
1 %pr. Hinges 1279-41/2x 4 %Z x US10 Hager
- 1 Stop 60C x US10 G.J.
. 1 set Silencers
• END OF SECTION 08711
noC)R HARnINARF nR.rn nR711 - 7
1�
I
• SECTION 08800-GLAZING
►1�
PART 1 - GENERAL
k
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1
I , � 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section.
�j 1. Exterior aluminum storefront framing: 1-inch insulating glass-tinted.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both,
' as defined in referenced glazing publications.
• B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a
specified gas.
C. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
'I Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
glass.
,I
� 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
and impact loads(where applicable)without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable
to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or
gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
corisfruction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only.
' Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass
lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than
thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the
following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
• according to the following requirements:
' a. Specified Design Wind Loads: On structural drawings.
' GLAZING 0650 08800- 1
C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the •
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass '
framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), '
material surfaces.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties '
specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures
indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. '
2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall
unit and for each lite.
I
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. '
B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch-square Samples for glass.
1. Each color of tinted float glass. '
2. Insulating glass for each designation indicated.
3. For each color of exposed glazing sealant indicated.
C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in •
preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that '
products furnished comply with requirements.
E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. ,
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in glass '
installations with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source limitations for clear glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary glass manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for tinted glass: Obtain tinted, heat absorbing, and light reducing float glass '
from one primary manufacturer for each tint color indicated.
D. Source Limitations for insulating glass: Obtain insulating glass units from one manufacturer
using the same type of glass and other components for each type indicated.
E. Source Limitations for tempered glass: Obtain tempered-glass units from one manufacturer '
using the same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated.
GLAZING 0650 08800- 2 1
'I
• F. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test
reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant
formulations within a 36-month period.
G. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and
that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction,for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
H. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired
glass,ANSI Z97.1.
f 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently
marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another
Ii1� certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
' I. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
i
1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed
Insulating Glass Units."
' J. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and
inspecting agency:
' 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
' exposure to sun, or other causes.
i
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
' temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install liquid glazing.sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions
are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant-manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4
deg C).
' 1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out
to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units
that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project
• site,within specified warranty period indicated below.
' 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
' GLAZING 0650 08800- 3
1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS •
2.1 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass
separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units
and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2"Insulating-Glass Units"Article.
1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where '
needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites
and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article. Provide kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated
or required by code.
2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1-inch overall, with not less than
inch for interior clear&exterior tinted pane . r
B. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:
1. Manufacturer's standard sealants. ,
C. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying
with the following requirements: '
1. Spacer Material: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish.
2. Comer Construction: Manufacturer's full range. r
D. Color: Match existing, bronze tinted. •
2.2 GLAZING GASKETS r
A. Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded r
corner units, black.
2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS r
A. General: Provide products of type indicated,complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with r
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. '
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for '
each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint
substrates. •
r
GLAZING 0650 08800-4 r
2.4 GLAZING TAPES
•
'I A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids
content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with
or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with
ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
I' 1. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with
! AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. Type 1,for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
� A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
' indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
j minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer
hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation
indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and
face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
• 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
rI 2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
GLAZING 0650 08800-'5
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION '
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. ,
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL '
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in '
referenced glazing publications.
B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable ,
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass ,
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance. ,
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by S
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing ,
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. ,
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: ,
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and ,
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of '
tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways '
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. ,
J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with ,
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
GLAZING 0650 08800-6 '
T
• 3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
i
make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
'i horizontal framing.joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at comers of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
'I Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
' F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
' A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
• with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression
gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against
faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of
openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending
' stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
i
3.6 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
_ supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do
• come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass
' manufacturer.
'i GLAZING 0650 08800 -7
i
i
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at •
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, ,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as '
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08800 '
1
•
1
i ,
•
1
GLAZING 0650 08800 -8
�I
f
'I
• SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
I'f
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
�11 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
j Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
�l 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls,framed soffits,furring, etc.).
' B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing"for exterior and interior load-bearing and
exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; exterior gypsum sheathing; exterior building wrap.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for wall treatments, sound batts and other materials
installed over steel framing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
•
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1A QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-
load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
1 assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
i
PART 2- PRODUCTS
i
2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
' A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120),hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
1
• 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire,
or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.
' NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 0650 09111 - 1
i
1
B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter. •
C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 ,
inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches. '
D. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide
flanges, 3/4 inch deep.
2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. ,
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch .
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. '
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch for standard steel non-load bearing
framing; Provide 0.0312 inch at all door frames and at framing supporting ceramic tile •
substrates.
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: i
1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes '
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Dietrich Metal Framing; TR Series with U-channel & Easy Clip angles.
2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SIFT).
C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated. '
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide
flanges.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. ,
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.
E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. •
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. '
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 0650 09111 - 2
1
2. Depth: 7/8 inch.
i •
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
'I A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:
1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick,in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3- EXECUTION
' 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
' conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
J 3.2 PREPARATION
' A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and
' that hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
' advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories,furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
' D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
• members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 0650 09111 - 3
3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES •
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior '
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
1. Space studs as follows:
a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. '
b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
C. Tile backing panels: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install tracks (runners)at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural ,
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs)at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished ,
assembly.
C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads. '
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
5. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches o.c.
D. Direct Furring: 1
1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. '
E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 09111 1101 -
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 0650 09111 -4 '
l
�f
• SECTION 09250-GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 -GENERAL
1I
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum board systems.
2. Finishing/patching existing gypsum board systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for load-bearing steel framing that
supports gypsum board.
2. Division 7 Section 'Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in
assemblies that incorporate gypsum board.
3. Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and
• suspension systems that support gypsum board.
4. Division 9 Section "Painting"for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.
'I
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory
indicated.
I
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire=resistance-rated assemblies,,provide materials and i
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
J weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat
• to prevent sagging.
,' GYPSUM BOARD 0650 09250- 1
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS •
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board '
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged. '
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. '
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELS, GENERAL ,
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area
and that correspond with support system indicated. ,
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
typ e A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M as a pp licable to
•
of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. '
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. G-P Gypsum.
C. National Gypsum Company.
d. USG Corporation.
B. Type X: '
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled)for prefilling. '
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced ,
galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead. •
b. Bullnose bead. ,
GYPSUM BOARD 0650 09250-2 ,
T
1�
• C. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
li�) d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control)joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
' 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
'i b. Gordon, Inc.
C. Pittcon Industries.
3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T5.
J 4. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials
specified.
11
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
,j A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
• B. Joint Tape:
'l 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
'I C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
,j 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
JJ use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
,i 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
'J 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
'i manufacturer's written recommendations.
• B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
' GYPSUM BOARD 0650 09250- 3
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. •
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from t
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer. '
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section 'Building Insulation."
F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section 'Building Insulation." '
PART 3 - EXECUTION '
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames '
and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold '
damaged. •
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. '
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL ,
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent
panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with ,
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate '
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. '
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, '
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke •
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. ,
GYPSUM BOARD 0650 09250 -4 ,
I,
• 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
' 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels. to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4-to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached
to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
' A. Install type 'X'fire-resistant gypsum board at all locations.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
• b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
' 3. Fastening Methods: Apply,gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
' 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-
rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
' vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
' D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
- board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
' GYPSUM BOARD 0650 09250 -5
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES •
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same ,
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions. ,
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved
by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: '
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. Bullnose Bead: Use where required or indicated.
3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4. L-Bead: Use where required or indicated.
5. U-Bead: Use where required or indicated. '
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ,
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. '
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints. ,
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C •
840: '
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 4: At all new gypsum board surfaces exposed to view, in preparation for new paint ,
finish.
a. Paint primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9
Sections.
3. Level 5: At existing gypsum board surfaces exposed to view, where wall-covering or
other finishes have been removed, in preparation for new paint finish.
a. Paint primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 '
Sections.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. ,
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, '
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or •
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. '
END OF SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD 0650 09250-6 '
it
'I
1
• SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
s
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1� 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1'
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
,) B. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
C. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
•
1� A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and
texture.
1 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension
h _ _ .
system through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the
following requirements:
II
1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or
Ij another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
11 a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory"or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
li
'i ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0650 09511 - 1
b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency. •
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-
burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined
by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content. I
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed '
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before '
beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. •
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other '
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
i
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. '
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0
percent of quantity installed.
•
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0650 09511 -2
�1
• PART 2 - PRODUCTS
'1
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
,} B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
'} 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing
J pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product
designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range
that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance,
Jacoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
'i 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING (Al)
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with .requirements, provide Armstrong -
,i Cortega Tegular#2195 to match lower level existing ceilings.
B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as
follows:
• 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, modular.
2. Pattern: D (fissured)
')
C. Color: White
D. LR: Not less than 0.80.
E. NRC: Not less than 0.55.
'i F. CAC: Not less than 35.
1
G. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled Tegular
H. Thickness: 9/16 inch.
I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.
1�
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
,I B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural
• and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide
manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0650 09511 -3
C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: •
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft '
temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than ,
0.106-inch-diameter wire.
D. Hanger Rods and Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. '
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING (Al):
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong —
Prelude XL or a comparable product.
B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll '
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with
prefinished 15/16-inch-(24-mm-)wide metal caps on flanges. '
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override(stepped)type. '
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-roiled sheet.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION '
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical '
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel '
ceilings.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ,
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at '
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. '
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design '
requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems •
Handbook." ,
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0650 09511 -4 ,
T
1,
• B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
5. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will
not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
6. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved.
' Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age,
corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
7. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
' hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete..
8. When steel framing ,does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
' 9. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
• 10. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
11. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from
' hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends
of each member.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers,
without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing
wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system
to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and
' connect securely.
2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
• 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
' ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0650 09511 - 5
2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension system runners and moldings. ,
3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of
reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel ,
manufacturer.
3.4 CLEANING '
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and '
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09511
I ,
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0650 09511 -6 ,
1
h
aSECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
I ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
t
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vinyl composition tile (VCT).
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section 'Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base, reducer
strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tile.
'+ 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
,] C. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure
behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained_ within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 50 deg F (10 deg C)or more than 90 deg F(32 deg C). Store tiles on flat surfaces.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
-� A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than.70 deg F
(21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in spaces to receive floor tile during the following
time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
'� RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 0650 09651 - 1
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C)or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). '
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged '
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and '
pattern of floor the installed.
PART 2- PRODUCTS '
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ,
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be '
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products listed in other Part 2
articles.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other '
Part 2 articles.
2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS '
A. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Patterns: Furnished by Architect at time of finish selection. Allow up to 10 percent for each
accent indicated.
2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE (R1) '
A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066.
1. Tarkett Inc.; Expressions, or approved equal.
B. Class: 2 (through-pattern tile). '
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). ,
E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: '
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 0650 09651 - 2 ,
'I 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I not less than 0.45 W/s . cm per
• q P
ASTM E 648.
ll 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
,f A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
)) blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
�1 B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
'l
PART 3- EXECUTION
,1 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
li in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
• 3.2 PREPARATION
'1 A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
JJ resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing:
'I a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after
substrates pass testing.
C. Remove substrate coatings-and-other-substances that are-incompatible...with.adhesives and-that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
'I D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
f substrates.
E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are
'I to be installed.
I
'` RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 0650 09651 -3
F. Sweep and vac u um clean s ubstrate s to be co vered by resilient products immediately before ,
•
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ,
i
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION ,
A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut '
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis.
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as ,
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. ,
C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures '
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and
nosings.
D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. '
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device. •
F. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation;
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. ,
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction ,
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible
adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer.
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. •
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 0650 09651 -4 ,
11
2. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper
• until Substantial Completion.
' 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or
plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll
objects over panels without moving panels.
C. Clean floor surfaces not more than 4 days before days before dates scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of the Project. Clean products
according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
j 1. Before cleaning, strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation
only if required to restore polish finish and if recommended by flooring manufacturer.
2. After cleaning, reapply polish to floor surfaces to restore protective floor finish according
to flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate with Owner's
maintenance program.
END OF SECTION 09651
•
' RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 0650 09651 - 5
,w
Il
11
SECTION 09653- RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
�I) 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1� A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1� 1.2 SUMMARY
1� A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wall base.
2. Molding accessories.
'J B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section"Resilient Tile Flooring"for materials and installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
IlA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
•
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
'1 A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide resilient stair accessories with a critical radiant
flux classification of Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm, as determined by testing identical
1� products per ASTM E 648 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
li 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
II ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
y than 50 deg F (10 deg C)or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).
1� 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
1 (21 deg C) or more'than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following
time periods:
• 1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
11 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0650 09653 - 1
3. 48 hours after installation. ,
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by '
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been '
completed.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS '
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. ,
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each
type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. '
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be '
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS
•
A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. '
2.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE (R2)
A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861. '
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Johnsonite '
3. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.
4. Roppe Corporation
5. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division ,
B. Type (Material Requirement): TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid). '
D. Style: Cove(with top-set toe).
E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
F. Height: 4 inches. '
G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. .
H. Outside Corners: Premolded. ,
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0650 09653 -2 '
• I. Inside Corners: Premolded.
J. Surface: Smooth.
ti 2.4 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications, Nosing for carpet, Nosing for resilient floor
covering, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering, and Joiner for tile and carpet.
1. Johnsonite.
'! 2. Roppe Corporation.
11 B. Material: Rubber.
C. Profile and Dimensions: As required.
' 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
' blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product
manufacturers for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
• C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread
' manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
' A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.
' 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions-have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
' B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
• contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
' Do not use solvents.
' RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0650 09653-3
o fill cracks holes and depressions in
C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound t p •
substrates.
D. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where '
they are to be installed.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before '
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of '
adjacent pieces aligned.
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base '
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. •
F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. '
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION '
A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would '
otherwise be exposed.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ,
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction '
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. •
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0650 09653-4 ,
T
I� 1. Apply protective floor polish to stair accessory surfaces that are free from soil, visible
adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
2. Cover stair accessory products with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial
I Completion.
3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over stair accessories. Place plywood or
1 hardboard panels over surfaces and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or
roll objects over panels without moving panels.
I
END OF SECTION 09653
'1
1
1
1
1
' RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0650 09653 - 5
• SECTION 09680-CARPET
�I PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
,i A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: Carpet and Installation.
'! B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Alternates"for a description of work related to this section included in
Alternates.
2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" "Resilient Tile Flooring" for
resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on
�.• physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations
for each type of substrate required.
i
B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
'i indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
~� 1. Carpet: 12-inch-square Sample.
' 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch-long Samples.
I
C. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
' D. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
i procedures and manufacturers recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.
,I
`J 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
• requirements.
', CARPET 0650 09680 - 1
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification ,
indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an •
independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for
product quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other manufacturers' '
products comparable in quality to named products and complying with requirements may be
considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of carpet from one source and by a single '
manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." '
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for ,
Project when occupied for its intended use.
C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond '
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. •
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet,
install carpet before installing these items.
1.7 WARRANTY '
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in ,
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace '
carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of
substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent '
loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special Carpet Cushion Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet cushion manufacturer ,
agreeing to replace carpet cushion that does not comply with requirements or that fails within
specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion '
due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failure includes, but is not
limited to, permanent indentation or compression. •
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. '
CARPET 0650 09680 -2 '
1
t1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but
not less than 5 sq. yd..
' PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that mey be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each carpet
' Product Data sheet at end of this Section.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
I ' formulation provided by or recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
' B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is
recommended by the following:
' 1. Carpet manufacturer.
C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to
prevent pile loss at seams.
' PART 3- EXECUTION
' 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
_ .
moisture content, alkalinity-range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and
comply with requirements specified.
' B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following:
• a. Carpet manufacturer.
CARPET 0650 09680- 3
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place '
Concrete"for slabs receiving carpet.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. '
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION '
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet ,
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive
carpet installation.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with '
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer. '
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with '
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION '
A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down Installation."
B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of
carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under
the door in closed position. '
C. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as '
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
E. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION '
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
•
CARPET 0650 09680 -4
T
,I -
1
PART 4—CARPET SCHEDULE
•
4.1 PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 —CARPET C1
l A. Carpet is"Summit'by Cambridge or equal as approved by the Architect.
I'! Yarn: DIATRON SD/BCF NYLON
Dye Method: Solution/Space Dye
Gauge: 1/10 in.
Stitches Per 3 inches: 13 S.P.I.
Pile height Tufted: .218 in. (high)
.094 in. (low)
,l Face weight Tufted: 28 oz./sq. yd. (949 gm/m2)
Primary Backing: Polypropylene
Secondary Backing: Woven Polyproplene
Width: 12 ft. (3.66 m)
Flooring Radiant Panel
(ASTM E 648): Class 1
NBS Smoke Chamber: Less Than 450 in Flaming Mode.
Flame Resistance
I 'I (DOC FF-1-70): Passes
Static Control: Less Than 3.5 K.V.
Soil Resistence: Commercial Anti-Soil Protection
'! Wear Warranty: 10 Year Limited Wear Warranty
END OF SECTION 09680
II
1�
11
1
1►
•
1�
CARPET 0650 09680 - 5
�j
• SECTION 09911 - PAINTING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
'l A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
11 Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior
items and surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
ishop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
iB. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material
is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned,
paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish
is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
• color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and
electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,
i and labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. Plastic laminated architectural woodwork.
b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
') C. Light fixtures.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible
' spaces:
a. Furred areas.
b. Ceiling plenums.
C. Pipe spaces.
d. Ddct Shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
C. Chromium plate.
'� d. Copper and copper alloys.
J e. Bronze and brass.
• 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
1
,� PAINTING 0650 09911 - 1
a. Valve and damper operators. '
b. Linkages. •
C. Sensing devices. ,
d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, '
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel"for shop priming structural steel. '
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for shop priming ferrous metal.
3. Division 8 Section"Steel Doors and Frames"for factory priming steel doors and frames. '
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. '
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at '
an 85-degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when t
measured at a 60-degree meter.
4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at
a 60-degree meter. '
•
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. ,
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and '
cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis '
and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1. After color selection,Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. ,
C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. '
1. Submit one (1) Sample on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and
texture only: '
a. Stained or Natural Wood: 4-by-8-inch Samples of natural- or stained-wood finish
on representative red oak surfaces. '
PAINTING 0650 09911 -2
T
,I 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
,I B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
' 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
' 6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
• daily.
r
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F.
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
' enclosed-*and heated- within temperature -limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
' 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
•
r
PAINTING 0650 09911 -3
I. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or 1 case,
as appropriate, of each material and color applied. •
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS '
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be ,
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: ,
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).
2. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). ,
3. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL ,
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and ,
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types ,
specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application •
indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not
be acceptable.
C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 EXTERIOR PRIMERS '
A. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior ,
application.
1. Benjamin Moore; IronClad Latex Low-Lustre Metal & Wood Enamel No. 363: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM
Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.
3. Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS Paint B50WZ3: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less
than 2.0 mils. ,
2.4 INTERIOR PRIMERS '
A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Regal FirstCoat Interior Latex Primer& Underbody No. 216: Applied at '
a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. •
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. '
PAINTING 0650 09911 -4 ,
11 3. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.
B. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal
primer.
1. Benjamin Moore; IronClad Alkyd Low Lustre Medal and Wood Enamel No. 163: Applied
1
at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-858 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer: Applied
at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.
3. Sherwin-Williams; Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.
2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic-latex
enamel for exterior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; MoorGlo Latex House & Trim Paint No. 096: Applied at a dry film
1� thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
3. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior Gloss Latex A-84 Series: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.
B. Exterior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss alkyd enamel for exterior
,I application.
• 1. Benjamin Moore; Impervo Enamel No. 133: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less
than 1.7 mils.
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss-Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.
3. Sherwin-Williams; Industrial Enamel B54 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
�( less than 2.0 mils.
2.6 INTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Regal AquaVelvet No. 319: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.4 mils.
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 89-Line Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Wall and Trim: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.
3. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Satin Wall Paint A87 Series: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.
B. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for
interior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Regal AquaGlo No. 333 Premium Interior Finishes Latex Semi-Gloss:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.
• 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi-Gloss
Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils.
' PAINTING 0650 09911 -5
3. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel A88 Series: Applied at t
a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. •
C. Interior Semigloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss alkyd enamel for interior
application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Satin Impervo Alkyd Low Lustre Enamel No. 235: Applied at a dry film '
thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and Trim Semi-Gloss
Oil: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. '
3. Sherwin-Williams; Classic 99 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel A-40 Series: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils.
2.7 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES '
A. Open-Grain Wood Filler: Factory-formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate ,
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No. 238. '
2. Pittsburgh Paints; none required.
3. Sherwin-Williams; Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler.
B. Interior Wood Stain: Factory-formulated alkyd-based penetrating wood stain for interior ,
application applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234. '
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-560 Rez Interior Semi-Transparent Oil Stain. •
3. Sherwin-Williams;Wood Classics Interior Oil Stain A-48 Series.
C. Clear Sanding Sealer: Factory-formulated fast-drying alkyd-based clear wood sealer applied at ,
spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Sanding Sealer No. 413. '
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-10 SpeedHide Quick-Drying Interior Sanding Wood Sealer and
Finish.
3. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26V43. '
D. Interior Alkyd- or Polyurethane-Based Clear Satin Varnish: Factory-formulated alkyd or
polyurethane-based clear varnish.
1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Polyurethane Finishes Low Lustre ,
No. 435.
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-7 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Clear. '
3. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Oil Varnish, Satin A66-300 Series.
PART 3- EXECUTION ,
3.1 EXAMINATION '
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application.
PAINTING 0650 09911 -6
,I 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
• and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
3. Remove decals, stamps and other manufacturer's markings that may show through
stained areas.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
tJ 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
'1
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical
or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
' workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel. surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze.
It If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of
surface preparation.
I a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and
' burn, correct-this condition before application. Do not paint-surfaces if moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
' spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white
shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming,
fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
• smooth when dried.
' PAINTING 0650 09911 - 7
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ,
ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, •
cases, and paneling. ,
C. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
d. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.
Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch
up with same primer as the shop coat. '
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. ,
D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required '
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. '
3.3 APPLICATION •
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and ,
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. '
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and '
provide desired protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only. '
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed '
surfaces.
8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or ,
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent •
surface deterioration. '
PAINTING 0650 09911 -8 '
r
�I
1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
• method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended
'} by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
k1 coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and. exposed fasteners receive a dry film
thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
' 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky
J . under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not
cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
�} C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate
size for surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
• exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Uninsulated metal piping.
2. Uninsulated plastic piping.
3. Pipe hangers and supports.
4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
5., Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets.
6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket
material.
7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
8. Access panels.
G. Electrical items to be-painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Switchgear.
2. Panelboards.
3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
PAINTING 0650 09911 -9
r
I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, •
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
J. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of
even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks,
orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1. Provide satin finish for final coats. '
K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements. '
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded r
paint materials from Project site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered i
paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished
surfaces.
1
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. '
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. •
B. Provide 'Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
r
A. (EPS-6) Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated
metal surfaces:
1. Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss alkyd enamel.
3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. (IPS-3) Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board
surfaces:
1. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. •
r
PAINTING 0650 09911 - 10
t�
�I a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
• b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.
,! B. (IPS-5) Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.
3.8 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE
'j A. (IPS-6) Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new interior woodwork:
1. Alkyd-Based Stain Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd-based clear satin
varnish over a sealer coat and interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain.
1;
a. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler.
' b. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain.
C. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer.
d. Finish Coats: Interior alkyd or polyurethane-based clear satin varnish.
END OF SECTION 09911
l
PAINTING 0650 09911 - 11
I
i)
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
SECTION 15181 -HYDRONIC PIPING
�) PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot-water
heating.
B. See Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for general piping
materials and installation requirements.
C. See Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for temperature-control valves
and sensors.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
'I A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, 'Building Services Piping," for.materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME
label.Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code,Section VIII,Division 1.
1.3 COORDINATION
�} A. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES,TUBES,AND FITTINGS
A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting
materials.
B. Copper Tube and Fittings:
-' 1. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing:ASTM B 88,Type L.
2. Wrought-Copper Fittings:ASME B16.22.
3. Wrought-Copper Unions:ASME B 16.22.
4. Solder Filler Metals:ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.
5. Brazing Filler Metals:AWS A5.8,Classification BAg-1.
2.2 CLEANING
A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens.
JAfter cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable
• fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.
HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 - 1
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
END OF SECTION 15181
1
•
HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 -2 '
Midwest Engineering& Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
1!
• SECTION 15815-METAL DUCTS
�l
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal, rectangular ducts and fittings for supply, return, outside, and
Iexhaust air-distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2-to plus 10-inch wg.
B. See Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, duct-mounting access doors and
�) panels,turning vanes,and flexible ducts.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
,I A. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 9013,"Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
i
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
'I A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
_. • product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
} offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
tI 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
_J
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
1� A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discoloration,and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming, quality.; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
'I having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
)) to view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
,i galvanized sheet metal ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
• METAL DUCTS 15815 - 1
Midwest Engineering&Design
1
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07 '
2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS •
A. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide;glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.
B. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable,
airtight seal.
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when '
cured, UL 723 listed,and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized
butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
E. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with '
ASTM C 920,Type S,Grade NS,Class 25,Use O.
F. Flange Gaskets:Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS r
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners ,
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate •
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod. '
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible '
with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates complying with ,
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION '
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod '
applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity ,
class required for pressure class.
METAL DUCTS 15815 -2 •
Midwest Engineering&Design
_ 1
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06107
1
• 2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's
' "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using
manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint
reinforcement.
1. Available Manufacturers:
' a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Nexus Inc.
C. Ward Industries, Inc.
C. Formed-On Flanges:Construct according to SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards-
-Metal and Flexible,"Figure 1-4,using corner,bolt,cleat,and gasket details.
1 1. Available Manufacturers:
' a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Lockformer.
2. Duct Size:Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class.
3. Longitudinal Seams:Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and
0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are
• lined.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS
3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible,"unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
C. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions,size,and shape and for connections.
' D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface--with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3
screws in each coupling.
1 E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
• METAL DUCTS 15815 -3
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T. and Finance) 06/07
G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch,plus allowance for insulation thickness. •
H. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions
unless specifically indicated.
I. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,
and similar finished work.
J. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward '
to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
L. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior '
walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct
insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4
sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
M. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior ,
walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers,sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke
dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and
installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop
Systems."
N. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed.Follow
SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction." •
3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING ,
A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg,seal transverse Joints.
B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch ,
intersection.
B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.
C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure load.
D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
E. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. ,
METAL DUCTS 15815 -4
Midwest Engineering&Design
r
r
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06107
1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches thick.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section
1 "Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNXs "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
' branch,outlet and inlet,and terminal unit connections.
END OF SECTION 15815
M
r
METAL DUCTS 15815 - 5
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
,1
I
• SECTION 15820-DUCT ACCESSORIES
�I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1! 1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 1. Volume dampers.
2. Turning vanes.
3. Duct-mounting access doors.
,l 4. Flexible connectors.
ll 5. Flexible ducts.
6. Duct accessory hardware.
,I B. See Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric and pneumatic
damper actuators.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:For the following:
1. Volume dampers.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,weights, loads,required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
• connection.
I. Special fittings.
,i 2. Wiring Diagrams:Power,signal,and control wiring.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. . Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
lPART 2-PRODUCTS
i
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
IfI
J 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
'I 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
• DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820- 1
Midwest Engineering&Design
J
.J
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for •
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise '
indicated.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on '
galvanized sheet metal ducts;compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch '
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 VOLUME DAMPERS '
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance,Inc. ,
2. American Warming and Ventilating.
3. Flexmaster U.S.A.,Inc.
4. McGill AirFlow Corporation. '
5. METALAIRE,Inc.
6. Nailor Industries Inc.
7. Penn Ventilation Company,Inc.
8. Ruskin Company. ,
9. Vent Products Company,Inc. •
B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen '
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class. ,
C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as
indicated,standard leakage rating,and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped,galvanized sheet steel channels,minimum of 0.064 inch thick, ,
with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to
walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades:0.064-inch-thick,galvanized sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles:Galvanized steel.
4. Bearings:Molded synthetic.
5. Tie Bars and Brackets:Galvanized steel. '
2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Available Manufacturers: ,
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Corp.
3. Ventfabrics,Inc.
•
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-2 '
Midwest Engineering&Design
1
' Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
i
• 4. Ward Industries,Inc.
B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181,Class 1.
C. Flexible Connector Fabric:Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight:26 oz./sq.yd..
j 2. Tensile Strength:4801bf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature:Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Available Manufacturers:
' 1. Flexmaster U.S.A.,Inc.
2. Hart&Cooley,Inc.
3. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
B. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate
supported by helically wound,spring-steel wire.
' 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg250 Pa negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity:4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.
C. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; [polyethylene] [aluminized]vapor barrier film.
' 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity:4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.
D. Flexible Duct Clamps:Nylon strap, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.
2.6 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
' suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
' A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous
- • Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-3
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion Q.T.and Finance) 06/07
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories •
in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, ,
and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.
D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner. '
E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths
from branch takeoff. '
F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved '
written instructions.
H. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and
terminal units as follows:
1. On both sides of duct coils. '
2. Downstream from volume dampers[,turning vanes,]and equipment.
3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers,providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links.
4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum
50-foot spacing. ,
5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available. •
1. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting,rectangular access doors:
I. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
J. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting,round access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter. '
2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter.
K. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and ,
motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
L. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with
loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. '
M. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible
duct.
N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with tape plus draw bands.
O. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. ,
3.2 ADJUSTING •
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-4 ,
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion (I.T.and Finance) 06/07
• A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
iII B. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing,
Adjusting,and Balancing."
END OF SECTION 15820
1
,I
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-5
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion (I.T.and Finance) 06/07
• SECTION 15840-AIR TERMINAL UNITS
i
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Bypass single-duct air terminal units
,) 1.2 SUBMITTALS
` A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated,include rated capacities, furnished specialties,
'I sound-power ratings,and accessories.
I1I B. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. NFPA Compliance: Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
1� PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 BYPASS SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Carnes.
2. Krueger.
3. METALAIRE,Inc.;Metal Industries Inc.
4. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.
' 5. Price Industries.
6. Titus.
• AIR TERMINAL UNITS 15840- 1
Midwest Engineering&Design
,I
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07 '
B. Configuration: Diverting-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components located •
inside a protective metal shroud. ,
C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel.
1. Casing Lining: 1/2-inch- thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ,
ASTM C 1071;secured with adhesive.
2. Air Inlet:Round stub connection for duct attachment.
3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.
4. Access: Removable panels for access to diverter and other parts requiring service,
adjustment,or maintenance;with airtight gasket.
D. Diverter Assembly:Galvanized-steel gate,with polyethylene linear bearings or equal. '
E. Electric Controls:Damper actuator and thermostat. ,
1. Damper Actuator:24 V,powered closed,powered open.
2. Thermostat: Wall-mounting electric type with temperature display in Fahrenheit, and
space temperature set point. ,
F. Electric Controls:Damper actuator and thermostat.
1. Damper Actuator:24 V,powered closed, [spring return open] [powered open]. ,
2. Thermostat: Wall-mounting electronic type with clock display, temperature display in
Fahrenheit and Celsius,and space temperature set point.
PART 3 -EXECUTION •
3.1 INSTALLATION '
A. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and
maintenance. ,
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings,and specialties. '
C. Install piping adjacent to air terminal units to allow service and maintenance.
D. Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping,"
connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange;
and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.
E. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Division 15 Section"Metal Ducts." '
F. Ground units with electric heating coils according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and
Bonding." '
G. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section"Conductors and Cables."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL '
•
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 15840-2 '
Midwest Engineering&Design
' Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
• A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
'i 1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized,test for
compliance with requirements.
2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
' 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 15840
1
1 .
• AIR TERMINAL UNITS 15840-3
Midwest Engineering&Design
I
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
• SECTION 15855-DIFFUSERS,REGISTERS,AND GRILLES
' PART1 -GENERAL
1
4 1.1 SUMMARY
'i A. This Section includes ceiling-and wall-mounted diffusers,registers,and grilles.
, I
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
' A. In oth er Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
�i 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
' 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
�• manufacturers specified.
' 2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS
1 A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers S 1 sheet M501:
1. Available Manufacturers:
` a. A-J Manufacturing Co.,Inc.
b. Anemostat;a Mestek Company.
4
C. Carnes.
d. Hart&Cooley,Inc.;Hart&Cooley Div.
e. Krueger.
'I f. METALAIRE,Inc.;Metal Industries Inc.
g. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.
y h. Price Industries.
i. Titus.
j. Tuttle&Bailey.
2. Material: Steel or Aluminum.
3. Finish:Baked enamel,color selected by Architect.
�) 4. Face Size:24 by 24 inches.
5. Face Style:Three cone or Four cone.
'} 6. Mounting:T-bar.
1 7. Pattern:Fixed.
,j• DIFFUSERS,REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 15855- 1
Midwest Engineering&Design
'J
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
8. Dampers:Radial opposed blade orButterfly. •
9. Accessories:
a. Equaling grid.
B. Perforated Diffuser;RI sheet M501: ,
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Air Research Diffuser Products,Inc.
b. A-J Manufacturing Co.,Inc.
C. Anemostat;a Mestek Company.
d. Carnes.
e. Hart&Cooley,Inc.;Hart&Cooley Div.
f. Krueger. '
g. METALAIRE,Inc.;Metal Industries Inc.
h. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.
i. Price Industries.
j. Titus. ,
k. Tuttle&Bailey.
1. Warren Technology.
2. Material: Steel backpan and pattern controllers,with steel face. t
3. Finish:Baked enamel,color selected by Architect.
4. Face Size:24 by 24 inches. '
5. Duct Inlet:Round.
6. Face Style:Flush. •
7. Pattern Controller:None.
8. Mounting:T-bar. '
9. Dampers:None.
10. Accessories:None.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL '
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." '
PART 3 -EXECUTION '
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers,registers,and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling
panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where Engineerural features or other items conflict
with installation,notify Engineer for a determination of final location. ,
•
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 15855-2
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
• C. Install diffusers,registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers,air extractors,and fire dampers.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 15855
t 1•
r
t
t
\J
' DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 15855 - 3
Midwest Engineering&Design
IJ
w
11
' Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
• SECTION 15900-HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
' 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device indicated,
labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.Indicate dimensions,capacities,performance
characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup
instructions for each type of product indicated.
' B. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is a certified installer of the automatic control
system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
• B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
' Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."
D. Year-2000 Compliant: Computer hardware and software shall be capable of accurately
processing, providing, and receiving date data from, into, and between the twentieth and
twenty-first centuries,including leap-year calculations.
1.4 COORDINATION
' A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans
and room details before installation.
' 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
•
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 1
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07 '
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the •
following:
1. Air Monitor Corp.
2. Atkomatic Valve Company,Inc. '
3. BEC Controls Corp.
4. Belimo Aircontrols,Inc.
5. CEA Instruments Inc. '
6. Channel Products Inc.
7. Condyne Technology,Inc.
8. Delta Controls Inc. ,
9. DGH Systems,LLC.
10. Diversified Electronics,Inc.
11. Ebtron,Inc.
12. Energyline Systems;Industrial Products Group.
13. Enerstat Corp.
14. Erie Controls.
15. Functional Devices Inc. ,
16. Gems Sensors.
17. General Eastern Instruments,Inc.
18. Greystone Energy Systems Inc.
19. Hayward Industrial Products,Inc. '
20. Heat-Timer Corp.
21. Honeywell, Inc.;Home&Building Control.
22. HyCal Sensing Products.
23. ICM Corp. '
24. Intec Controls Corp. •
25. Johnson Controls, Inc.;Controls Group. ,
26. KMC Controls/Kreuter Manufacturing Company.
27. Landis&Staefa,Inc.
28. Leslie Controls,Inc.
29. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. '
30. Mamac Systems.
31. Paragon Electric Co.,Inc.
32. Parker Hannifin Corp.; Skinner Valve Division.
33. RAM Electronics Corp.
34. RDF Corporation.
35. Sauter Controls Corporation.
36. Sensidyne,Inc. ,
37. Sherwood Products, Inc.
38. Spence Engineering Co.,Inc.
39. SSAC Inc. ,
40. TCSBASYS Controls;HVAC Sensors&Transducers Division.
41. Texas Instruments,Inc.;Commercial Sensors&Controls.
42. Thunder Scientific Corporation. '
43. Time Mark Corporation.
44. Tour&Andersson Control,Inc.;HVAC Sensors&Transducers Div.
45. TSI Inc.;Environmental Measurements&Controls Div.
46. Uni-Line North America;Robertshaw Division. '
47. Vaisala,Inc.
48. Valvcon Corporation. •
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-2
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
!I
• 49. Vent Products Co.,Inc.
2.2 CONTROL PANELS
i
2.3 ANALOG CONTROLLERS
!� 2.4 THERMOSTATS
!I A. Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Line-voltage thermostat with two-,three-, or four-
position,push-button or lever-operated fan switch.
1. Label switches "FAN ON-OFF," "FAN HIGH-LOW-OFF," "FAN HIGH-MED-LOW-
�i OFF."Provide unit for mounting on two-gang switch box.
B. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch
type,with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater.
C. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated,
enclosed,snap-switch type,or equivalent solid-state type,with heat anticipator,integral manual
!i on-off-auto selector switch.
1. Equip thermostats, which control electric heating loads directly, with off position on dial
!; wired to break ungrounded conductors.
2. Dead Band: Maximum 2 degree-way valves shall have linear characteristics. Operators
shall close valves against pump shutoff head.
!i 2.5 DAMPERS
A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design; 0.1084-inch minimum, galvanized-
steel frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.0635-inch
1 galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches.
Ji1. Blades shall be secured to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated
J hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and
brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at
each end of every blade.
--! B. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 degree Project-site visits, when
requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and to assist Owner's personnel in
! making program changes and in adjusting sensors and controls to suit actual conditions.
1
END OF SECTION 15900
!I
!I
!I
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-3
!I
Midwest Engineering&Design
11
1 Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
SECTION 15950-TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1. Air Systems:
1 a. Constant-volume air systems.
b. Variable-air-volume systems.
C. Multizone systems.
' 2. Hydronic Piping Systems:
' a. Constant-flow systems.
b. Variable-flow systems.
3. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings.
4. Existing systems TAB.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.
B. Warranties specified in this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Firm Qualifications:Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.
B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB.plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from TAB firm's forms approved by Architect.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
' TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950 - 1
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion Q.T.and Finance) 06/07
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, ,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities. '
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the
Contract Documents.Guarantee shall include the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract '
Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits. '
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems'designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow- ,
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing
devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system
and equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division I Section "Project Record
Documents."
D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions ,
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data
to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or
unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system
effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950-2 ,
Midwest Engineering & Design
' Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
• factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,
"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
' cleaning,adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
' I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed,bearings are greased,
belts are aligned and tight,and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
1 K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
L. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.
M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
N. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
1 P. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers,valves,and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
' 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions.This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes,
and variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way
mixing and diverting valves,are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950-3
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T. and Finance) 06/07 ,
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. •
8. Controller set points are set at indicated values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and ,
record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports.Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. '
2. Hydronic systems are filled,clean,and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance,smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met. ,
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems-Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing"and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those
removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this ,
Project.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent ,
identification material,including damper-control positions,valve position indicators, fan-speed-
control levers,and similar controls and devices,to show final settings.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS '
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems'"as-built"duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems,develop a plan to simulate diversity.
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950 -4
Midwest Engineering&Design
i
1�
,I Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
� I
• D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
1�
E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers,through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
J F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches,electrical interlocks,and motor starters.
'I G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
JJ H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
12 I. Check for airflow blockages.
' J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
JK. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
�I L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
�I A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed
by fan manufacturer.
Ii 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
Ja. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
' upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
C. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
�) possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
' rooftop unit,and other air-handling and-treating equipment.
�.� a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
I
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment,and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
J calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
wil
•
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950-5
Midwest Engineering&Design
�I
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T. and Finance) 06/07
5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than •
indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical ,
connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower. '
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube '
traverse measurements,measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust
submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. i
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors. •
D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the ,
indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-point
airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the
fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch
ducts.
B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been
adjusted,adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position
that simulates full-cooling load.
2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.
Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for .
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950-6
Midwest Engineering&Design
i
i
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
• the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal-unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome
terminal-unit discharge system losses.
3. Measure total system airflow.Adjust to within indicated airflow.
4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to
make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream
from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as
described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as
described for constant-volume air systems.
7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure
controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is
maintained at the most critical unit.
I8. Record the final fan performance data.
C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems
have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Balance systems similar to constant-volume air systems.
2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
1 3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of
the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets
downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan, if one is
installed,and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.
6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static
pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.
7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as
' described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out:of balance at minimum airflow,report the condition but leave
the outlets balanced for maximum.airflow.
' 8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as
1 described for constant-volume air systems.
D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have
been adjusted,adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950- 7
1 Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal
units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are
distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set
at maximum airflow.
3. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition.
4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing
progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to '
indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
6. Measure static pressure at the sensor.
7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as
described for constant-volume air systems.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MULTIZONE SYSTEMS
A. Set unit at full flow through the cooling coil if coil has that capacity.
B. Adjust each zone damper to indicated airflow.
3.8 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS ,
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built"piping layouts. ,
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to
the general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2. Check expansion tank liquid level. '
3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow.
5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal ,
valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so '
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement
pumps:
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950- 8
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
• 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
' differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow
and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open,read pressure differential across the pump
!. and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until
indicated water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
Ii4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed,at calculated presettings.
' C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust,where necessary,to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop
relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
1 percent greater than indicated flow.
E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated
flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads,and systems'pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.
3.10 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at
maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic
systems.
3.11 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger:Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
I. Manufacturer,model,and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
' 3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
•
1 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950- 9
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07 ,
5. Nameplate and measured voltage,each phase. •
6. Nameplate and measured amperage,each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper
operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers,
and nameplate data.
3.12 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS
A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of
indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller
installation,do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller
manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design ,
conditions:
1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures,pressure drop,and water flow. ,
2. If water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure
drop,and water flow.
3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments
furnished by chiller manufacturer.
4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt.
5. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt.
6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.
7. If air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data
including number of fans and entering-and leaving-air temperatures.
3.13 PROCEDURES FOR COOLING TOWERS
A. Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and verify that makeup and blowdown
systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the
following tests and record the results:
1. Measure condenser-water flow to each cell of the cooling tower. ,
2. Measure entering-and leaving-water temperatures.
3. Measure wet and dry-bulb temperatures of entering air.
.4. Measure wet-and dry-bulb temperatures of leaving air.
5. Measure condenser-water flow rate recirculating through the cooling tower.
6. Measure cooling tower pump discharge pressure.
7. Adjust water level and feed rate of makeup-water system.
3.14 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS '
A. Verify proper rotation of fans.
B. Measure entering-and leaving-air temperatures.
C. Record compressor data.
3.15 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS •
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950- 10 i
Midwest Engineering& Design
li
1!
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
• A. If hydronic,measure entering-and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.
�I
� B. If steam,measure entering-water temperature and flow and leaving steam pressure,temperature,
and flow.
3.16 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
I
i
A. Water Coils:Measure the following data for each coil:
,I
� 1. Entering-and leaving-water temperature.
2. Water flow rate.
�I 3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
1 6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
B. Electric-Heating Coils:Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering-and leaving-air temperature at full load.
' 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
1 C. Refrigerant Coils:Measure the following data for each coil:
1 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
' 4. Air pressure drop.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.17 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic
temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet-and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive
eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature
settings.Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
tC. Measure outside-air,wet-and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.18 PROCEDURES FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each kitchen hood. For kitchen hoods designed with
integral makeup air, measure and adjust the exhaust and makeup airflow. Measure airflow by
1 duct Pitot-tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, provide an explanation in
the report of the reason(s)why and also the reason why the method used was chosen.
•
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950- 11
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
1. Install welded test ports in the sides of the exhaust duct for the duct Pitot-tube traverse. •
Install each test port with a threaded cap that is liquid tight.
B. After balancing is complete,do the following:
1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust-duct connection.
2. Measure and record the hood face velocity. Make measurements at multiple points across
the face of the hood. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12 inches (300 mm)
between points and between any point and the perimeter. Calculate the average of the
measurements recorded. Verify that the hood average face velocity complies with the
Contract Documents and governing codes.
3. Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting device.
Observe the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to room airflow patterns to achieve
optimum results.
C. Visually inspect the hood exhaust duct throughout its entire length in compliance with ,
authorities having jurisdiction. Begin at the hood connection and end at the point it discharges
outdoors. Report findings. '
1. Check duct slopes as required.
2. Verify that duct access is installed as required.
3. Verify that point of termination is as required. '
4. Verify that duct air velocity is within the range required.
5. Verify that duct is within a fire-rated enclosure.
D. Report deficiencies. ,
3.19 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
1. Measure and record the operating speed,airflow,and static pressure of each fan. '
2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate
information.
3. Check the refrigerant charge. '
4. Check the condition of filters.
5. Check the condition of coils.
6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate drain trap.
7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements
taken.Report deficiencies.
B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is ,
to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.
1. New filters are installed. ,
2. Coils are clean and fins combed.
3. Drain pans are clean.
4. Fans are clean.
5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. •
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950- 12 t
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
• C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are
affected by the renovation work.
1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and
' determine the new fan,speed, filter,and coil face velocity.
2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face
velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment
manufacturer.
3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than 5
percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and water flow
rates. If 5 percent or less,equipment adjustments are not required.
4. Air balance each air outlet.
3.20 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
' D. Check the operation of limiting controllers(i.e.,high-and low-temperature controllers).
E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices.Note air pressures and device positions and
• correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
1 changes.
G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
' H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates
on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.21 TOLERANCES
' A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1 1. Supply, Return,and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans:Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets:0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating Water Flow Rate:0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate:0 to minus 5 percent.
i3.22 FINAL REPORT
•
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950 - 13
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07 '
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in •
three-ring binder,tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer. ,
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures,along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents:In addition to certified field report data,include the following: ,
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves. ,
3. Manufacturers'test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings
and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report,as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of TAB firm. '
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address. '
6. Engineer's name and address. •
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units,including manufacturer,type size,and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated
values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: '
a. Settings for outside-,return-,and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters. ,
C. Cooling coil,wet-and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air,static-pressure controller. •
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950- 14 1
Midwest Engineering&Design
T'
' Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
LI. Quantities of outside,supply, return,and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct,outlet,and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
3.23 ADDITIONAL TESTS
' A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak
summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 15950
.J •
_J
1
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15950- 15
Midwest Engineering&Design
IT
' Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
•
' SECTION 16050-BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1.1 GENERAL
A. The following definitions apply to this Section:
' 1. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
t 2. MC: Metal-clad Cable
3. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
4. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
5. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
6. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
C. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in
building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural
components as they are constructed.
D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished
surfaces.
E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of
identification devices with completion of finished surface.
' F. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar
finishes,coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.
1.2 PRODUCTS
A. EMT: ANSI C80.3,zinc-coated steel,with set-screw or compression fittings.
B. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
1 C. IMC: ANSI C80.6,zinc-coated steel,with threaded fittings.
D. LFMC: Zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket.
E. RNC: NEMA TC 2,Schedule 40 PVC,with NEMA TC3 fittings.
4 F. Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for the raceway type with which used.
G. Conductors,No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper.
H. Conductors,Larger Than No. 10 AWG: Stranded copper.
I. Insulation: Thermoplastic,rated at 75 deg C minimum.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050- 1
`- Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07 ,
J. Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size,ampacity rating,material,type,and class suitable for service •
indicated. '
K. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers,riser clamps,straps,threaded C-clamps with
retainers,ceiling trapeze hangers,wall brackets,and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers. ,
L. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53,Type E,Grade A,Schedule 40,galvanized steel,plain ends.
M. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type. '
N. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
O. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.
P. Identification Devices: Colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1,NFPA 70,and these Specifications.
1. Raceway and Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1,Table 3, for minimum size of letters for
legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
1.3 EXECUTION ,
A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and '
install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
B. Materials and Components: Install level,plumb,and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems '
and components,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service,maintenance,and repair or replacement of components. Connect
for ease of disconnecting,with minimum interference with other installations. ,
D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
E. Use the following raceways for outdoor installations: '
1. Exposed: IMC.
2. Concealed: EMT,MC
3. Underground: RNC. '
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type 3R or Type 4.
F. Use the following raceways for indoor installations:
1. Exposed and Concealed: EMT.
2. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC;except in wet or damp locations,use LFMC. '
3. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC.
4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type 1,unless otherwise indicated.
G. Conceal raceways and cables,unless otherwise indicated,within finished walls,ceilings,and floors.
H. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water
pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
I. Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-2 '
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
• J. Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight
I
legs of offsets parallel,unless otherwise indicated.
K. Use raceway and cable fittings compatible with raceways and cables and suitable for use and location.
L. Install raceways embedded in slabs in middle third of slab thickness where practical,and leave at least f-
inch concrete cover..
,I M. Install pull wires in empty raceways.
N. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration,noise transmission,or movement with a maximum of
'I 72-inch flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor
across flexible connections.
O. Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface.
iP. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway.
Q. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway.
R. Remote-Control Signaling and Power-Limited Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in
raceway for Classes 1,2,and 3,unless otherwise indicated.
S. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better
mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1 T. Install wiring at outlets with at least 6 inches of slack conductor at each outlet.
• U. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical
connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A.
V. Electrical Supports in Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-
channel system components.
W. Electrical Supports in Dry Locations: Steel materials.
X. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
Y. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts,
clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods
and conduits.
Z. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-or bracket-type hangers.
AA. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in
the future.
BB. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate,malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
CC. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by
raceway supports,with no weight load on raceway terminals.
DD. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls. Install sleeves for cable
• and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
' BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-3
Midwest Engineering&Design
i
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
EE. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure •
FF. Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows: ,
1. Bands: Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent
bands of two-color markings in contact,side by side.
2. Band Locations: At changes in direction,at penetrations of walls and floors,at 50-foot maximum
intervals in straight runs,and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
3. Colors: As follows: '
a. Fire Alarm System: Red.
b. Security System: Blue and yellow. '
C. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.
GG. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve
fire-resistance rating of the assembly.
HH. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the
course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and
functionality. '
II. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations,indicated to be demolished, in
their entirety.
JJ. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2
inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing
finish.
KK. Remove demolished material from Project site. •
LL. Remove,store,clean,reinstall,reconnect,and make operational components indicated for relocation.
MM. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit
electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. ,
NN. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces.
Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and
other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
END OF SECTION 16050
1
1
•
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-4 '
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
• SECTION 16060-GROUNDING AND BONDING
1.1 GENERAL
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
1. Comply with UL 467.
'i
� 1.2 PRODUCTS
' A. Grounding Conductors: For insulated conductors,comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and
Cables."
1. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
2. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to
provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.
' 1.3 EXECUTION
iA. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth,
• concrete,masonry,crushed stone,and similar materials.
B. In raceways,use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
' C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.
' D. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities
of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes,or more conductors than required
by NFPA 70 are indicated.
1. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits.
2. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from the grounding
bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on
busway.
3. Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs
from computer-area power panels or power-distribution units.
4. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor
connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and
from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of
the applicable derived system or service,unless otherwise indicated.
5. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless
they are designated for telephone or data cables.
6. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted
electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond
conductor to each unit and to air duct:
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060- 1
Midwest Engineering&Design
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T,and Finance) 06/07
E. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. •
Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or ,
damage.
F. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers or ,
supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor
locations,unless a disconnect-type connection is required;then,use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly
to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations
accessible for maintenance. '
G. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated
pumps,fans,blowers,electric heaters,and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding straps. ,
H. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve.
1. Connections: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select ,
connectors,connection hardware,conductors,and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be
galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact ,
points closer to order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean,bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. '
4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical
clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. ,
6. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that •
are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
7. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No.8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type
grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged '
pressure-type connectors.
8. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings
without mechanical and electrical connection to housing,terminate each conduit with a grounding
bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or ,
terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with
grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors,unless otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 16060
i
•
t
GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-2 !
Midwest Engineering&Design
T
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07
I� SECTION 16511-INTERIOR LIGHTING
1.1 GENERAL
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs.
1.2 PRODUCTS
A. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows,unless otherwise indicated:
' 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
B. Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output, and
with an"A"sound rating.
' C. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Unless otherwise indicated,features include the following:
1. Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
2. Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound.
• 3. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on
surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.
4. Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound.
' D. Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924 and with authorities having jurisdiction for sign colors and lettering
size.
1. Internally Lighted Signs: As follows:
a. Lamps for AC/DC Operation: Light-emitting diodes, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp
life.
' E. Emergency Fluorescent Power Supply Unit: . Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit factory
mounted within fixture body. Comply with UL 924.
1. Test Switch and Light-Emitting Diode Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening
fixture or entering ceiling space.
2. Battery: Sealed,maintenance-free,nickel-cadmium type with minimum 10-year nominal life.
3. Charger: Fully automatic,solid-state,constant-current type.
4. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from unit when normal supply circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamp,and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
F. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer,free of defects.
2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant.
•
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 1
Midwest Engineering&Design
I'-
Municipal Building Expansion(I.T.and Finance) 06/07 ,
1.3 EXECUTION •
A. Set fixtures level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturer's
written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each fixture.
B. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support.
1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more
than 6 inches from fixture corners. '
END OF SECTION 16511
iII
•
i
i
1
i
•
INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 -2 ,
Midwest Engineering&Design
•
ADDENDUM NO. I
,July 17, 2007
TO: PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR.
MUNICIPAL BUILDING EXPANSION
CITY OF .11EFFERSON
320 EAST McCARTY STREET
JF-FFERS014 4C 1T , MISSOURI
The Architects Alliance, Inc,
631 West Main Street
Jefferson City, Missouri 65101-1531
Tel: 573.636.5000 Fax: 573.636.61133
Bidders are hereby informed that the construction documents are Modified as follows:
PROJECT MANUALL& SPECIFICATIONS:
1. Section 01500—TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS,add the following:
Use of Premises and Staging and Locating of Construction Equipment
All staging of equipment and materials for this project shall be confined to the easterly
• most parking row on City Parking Lot#24.This lot is located across Adams Street to the
East of the Municipal Building.
At no time during the life of the project shall any cons"ciion equipment or vehicles
belonging to the contractor, his employees,or other vehicles associated with the
construction of this project be parked City Parking Lot 9 27.This lot is located to the south
of the Municipal Building.
The contractor shall stage his work In such a fashion as to minimize the time in which
Handley Way(the alley to the south of the Municipal Building) is obstructed. At no time
shalt vehicles be parked in the alley If they are not actively engaged In the work of the
project. If It is necessary to close the alley to traffic the contractor shall give.24 hours
notice of his intent.
Access to the lower level of the Municipal building through the two southern facing doors
shall be maintained at all times.
The contractor shall access the work site by use of the western facing door on the upper
level of the Municipal Building.
The positioning of a dumpster for demolition and construction debris shall be such that it:
does not interfere with traffic on Handley way or interfere with the normal operations of
City Staff.
2, Section 07531 —EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING, modify the following:
A. Paragraph 1.4.0.2.-
' ..
2. Firefflindstorm Classification:Class 11A-90.
AddendUnl NO. 1 J 0650 Page 1 of 2
I, '
I '
3. Section 08410 — ALUM INUM-FRAIVIED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS, modify the
following:
A. Paragraph 2,1.8.-
B. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for aluminum-framed systerris is lased
can Kawneer Trlfab VG 4,51T (Front-0G) Framing System. Subject to
compliance with requiremepAs, provide the named product: oi- ai comparat'lle
product bl(one of the lollowing':
1. Kawneer
2. Vistawall Architectural Products.
3. EFCO Corporation
4. Tubellte Inc.
5. United States Aluminum
DRAWINGS:
1. A102—REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND ROOF PLAN, modify as follows:
1. See attached sheet Al for revised roof plan.
ATTACHMENTS:
Drawing All,dated 7.17.07
END OF ADDENDUM I
•
I '
i ,
•
'' Addendum No.. 1 0550 Page 2 of 2
1 '•
e
1�
--ROOF DRAINS
HEirH. EQUIP.
1
ti Typ.
• r
`'. ROOF DRAINS
NO TE5_
1
X
F,00F= FLAN 1) J" PER FOOT KNIMUM SLOPE
Al 2.? HINIMUM "" OF Ii' SULATION ,A,T R:OCIF DR"1-',11,45-
WY OF JEFFERSON I 'A I
320 EALST IWIcCARU•Y'$TREE' .I .
JEFFERSON CITY', MISSOURI PROJ, 0650 ����'
• FINANCE DEPARTMENT
PURCHASING DIVISION
SUBJECT: Bid No. 2351 - Municipal Building Expansion - Relocation of IT
Department, IT/Finance Department, Opened on July 20, 2007
BIDS RECEIVED:
GBH Builders, Jefferson City, MO $ 419,000.00
United HRB, Jefferson City, MO $ 497,000.00
WAVCO, Jefferson City, MO $ 483,400.00
Seven other bidders were contacted but did not return a bid, the project was advertised in News
Tribune, posted on the city web site, and forwarded to seven plan rooms.
FISCAL NOTE:
3502-9900-7350-6061 - City Hall Remodeling
2006-07 Budget $ 398,000.00
Architectural Services $ 27,000.00
• Bid 2351* $ 369,639.00
Balance $ 1,361.00
* Modifications and deductions as attached.
PAST PERFORMANCE:
GBH Builders has been awarded construction contracts for the City in the past and has
completed projects as specified and bid.
RECOMMENDATION:
Staff recommends award to GBH Builders of Jefferson City, Missouri, for a reduced
scope of work as outlined in the attached for a not to exceed contract amount of $369,639.00.
ATTACHMENTS - SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION
Signature,`e1C'1A w' U
Purcha ' ent Director, Information Technology Services
Director, Finance Department
E'-B i I er
•
__A3 z
i
General Contractors
August 15, 2007
The Architects Alliance
631 West Main
Jefferson City, MO 65101
Re: Municipal Building Expansion (LT. and Finance)
City of Jefferson
320 East McCarty Street
Jefferson City, MO
Listed below are some cost saving ideas for the above-referenced project.
-Eliminate detail G12—A101
Completely remove the overhead coiling door, frame and glass @ proposed transaction
counter. Also remove new glass from existing frame. Includes all associated framing
• and finish work.
Delete Glass& Glazing $375.00
Delete HM Frames $290.00
Delete Carpentry Labor $200.00
Delete Painting $50.00
Delete Overhead Coiling Door(labor incl.) $1,311.00
Total $2,226.00
-Eliminate operable windows
Replace the operable windows with standard storefront framing& glass
Delete operable windows&replace w/glass $5,624.00
-Eliminate work @ Rooms 110
Eliminate the drywall partitions and door openings.
Room 110 $1,245.00
-Eliminate new ceiling work @ existing portion of Room 105
Eliminate the demolition and installation of new ceilings in the area. Also includes
eliminating all electrical circuits and new lighting for 101, 102, 105 & 110. We will have
to remove several existing tiles for access, and we will have to build a drywall header the
• length of the building to accommodate the change from new ceiling to old.
Delete Electrical $10,050.00
Delete Acoustical Ceilings $6,000.00
Add Drywall Header $1.500.00
Total $14,550.00
I
-Eliminate the preconstruction testing and the test& balance by a certified balance company.
• We can take&record CFM readings @ the end of the project.
Delete testing $3,800.00
-Eliminate brick veneer and replace w/spandrel glass per SSI #1.
Delete Structural Steel Framing $4,500.00
Delete Installation of SS Framing $2,640.00
Delete Brick Veneer $9,026.00
Add Aluminum Framing & Spandrel Glass $5,250.00
Total $10,916.00
-Eliminate carpeting& VCT as detailed on the finish schedule.
Delete Floor Covering $12,500.00
Add for concrete prep& sealer $1,500.00
Total $11,000.00
Please bear in mind that these are estimates and that cost may fluctuate slightly pending the final
changes. We feel the estimates are VERY close, yet some things may have been overlooked due
to the time constraints.
iPlease advise if we can offer any additional information.
Thank you,
Jake Hunget
President
PO Box 945
Jefferson City, MO 65102
Phone: 573/893-3633 - Fax: 573/893-5847